]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blame - ld/ld.texinfo
Sync with gcc repository.
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8
NC
4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
5@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 6@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 7@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
8@include configdoc.texi
9@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 10@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 11@c man end
252b5132
RH
12
13@c @smallbook
14
ff5dcc92
SC
15@macro gcctabopt{body}
16@code{\body\}
17@end macro
18
0285c67d
NC
19@c man begin NAME
20@ifset man
21@c Configure for the generation of man pages
22@set UsesEnvVars
23@set GENERIC
0285c67d 24@set ARM
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set I960
0285c67d 28@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 29@set M68K
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
32@set POWERPC
33@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
34@set Renesas
35@set SPU
36@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 37@set WIN32
e0001a05 38@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
39@end ifset
40@c man end
41
252b5132
RH
42@ifinfo
43@format
44START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
45* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
46END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
47@end format
48@end ifinfo
49
0e9517a9 50@copying
e49e529d
JM
51This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54@end ifset
55version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 56
0e9517a9 57Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000,
8a308ae8 582001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9c8ebd6a 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
903249d7 962002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
137@end ifset
138@ifset I960
139* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
141@ifset ARM
142* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143@end ifset
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
147@ifset M68HC11
148* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
149@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
150@ifset M68K
151* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
159@ifset SPU
160* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
161@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
162@ifset TICOFF
163* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
164@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
165@ifset WIN32
166* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
167@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
168@ifset XTENSA
169* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
170@end ifset
252b5132
RH
171@end ifclear
172@ifclear SingleFormat
173* BFD:: BFD
174@end ifclear
175@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
176
177* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
178* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 179* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 180* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 181@end menu
84ec0e6d 182@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
183
184@node Overview
185@chapter Overview
186
187@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
188@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 189
0879a67a 190@ifset man
0285c67d 191@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 192ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
193@c man end
194
195@c man begin SEEALSO
196ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
197the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
198@file{ld}.
199@c man end
200@end ifset
201
202@c man begin DESCRIPTION
203
ff5dcc92 204@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 205their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 206compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 207
ff5dcc92 208@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
209a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
210to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
211
0285c67d
NC
212@ifset man
213@c For the man only
ece2d90e 214This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
215@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
216language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
217@end ifset
218
252b5132 219@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
220This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
221to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
222write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
223@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
224available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
225@end ifclear
226
227Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
228linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
229execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 230@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
231(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
232
0285c67d
NC
233@c man end
234
252b5132
RH
235@node Invocation
236@chapter Invocation
237
0285c67d
NC
238@c man begin DESCRIPTION
239
ff5dcc92 240The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
241and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
242you have many choices to control its behavior.
243
0285c67d
NC
244@c man end
245
252b5132
RH
246@ifset UsesEnvVars
247@menu
248* Options:: Command Line Options
249* Environment:: Environment Variables
250@end menu
251
252@node Options
253@section Command Line Options
254@end ifset
255
256@cindex command line
257@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
258
259@c man begin OPTIONS
260
252b5132
RH
261The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
262practice few of them are used in any particular context.
263@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 264For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
265object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
266link a file @code{hello.o}:
267
268@smallexample
269ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
270@end smallexample
271
ff5dcc92 272This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
273result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
274the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
275directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
276
ff5dcc92 277Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
278point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
279as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
280which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
281files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
282different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
283occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
284option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
285noted in the descriptions below.
286
287@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
288Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
289together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
290options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
291an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
292
293Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
294specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
295and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
296are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
297message @samp{No input files}.
298
36f63dca 299If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
300assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
301augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
302linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
303permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
304or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
305@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
306script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
307extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
308to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
309the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
310
311For options whose names are a single letter,
312option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
313whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
314option that requires them.
315
316For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 317precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 318@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 319this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 320only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
321@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
322name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
323output.
324
325Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
326option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
327immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
328@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
329Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
330accepted.
252b5132 331
36f63dca
NC
332Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
333(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
334prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
335compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
336
337@smallexample
2509a395 338 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
339@end smallexample
340
341This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
342silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
343may also arise when passing options that require values through a
344driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
345a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
346and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
347the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
348
349@smallexample
350 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
351@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
352
353Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
354linker:
355
ff5dcc92 356@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 357@include at-file.texi
dff70155 358
2509a395
SL
359@kindex -a @var{keyword}
360@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
361This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
362argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
363@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
364@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
365to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
366
7ee314fa
AM
367@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
368@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
370@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
371specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
372will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
373finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
374it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
375This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
376interface.
377
252b5132
RH
378@ifset I960
379@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
380@kindex -A @var{arch}
381@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
382@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
383@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
384In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
385Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
386@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
387the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 388archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
389family}, for details.
390
ff5dcc92 391Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
392other architecture families.
393@end ifset
394
395@ifclear SingleFormat
396@cindex binary input format
397@kindex -b @var{format}
398@kindex --format=@var{format}
399@cindex input format
400@cindex input format
401@item -b @var{input-format}
402@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
403@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
404file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 405@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 406that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 407configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 408to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
409default input format the most usual format on each machine.
410@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
411supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
412formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
413@xref{BFD}.
414
415You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
416binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
417linking object files of different formats), by including
418@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 419particular format.
252b5132
RH
420
421The default format is taken from the environment variable
422@code{GNUTARGET}.
423@ifset UsesEnvVars
424@xref{Environment}.
425@end ifset
426You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
427@code{TARGET};
428@ifclear man
429see @ref{Format Commands}.
430@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
431@end ifclear
432
433@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
434@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
435@cindex compatibility, MRI
436@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
437@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 438For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 439files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
440@ifclear man
441@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
442@end ifclear
443@ifset man
444the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
445@end ifset
446Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 447the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
448scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
449If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
450specified by any @samp{-L} options.
451
452@cindex common allocation
453@kindex -d
454@kindex -dc
455@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 456@item -d
252b5132
RH
457@itemx -dc
458@itemx -dp
459These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
460compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
461even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
462script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
463@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
464
7ee314fa
AM
465@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
466@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
467@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
470@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
471specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
472will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
473option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
474The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
475
252b5132
RH
476@cindex entry point, from command line
477@kindex -e @var{entry}
478@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 479@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
480@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
481Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
482program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
483named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
484and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
485base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
486@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
487and other ways of specifying the entry point.
488
b58f81ae
DJ
489@kindex --exclude-libs
490@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
491Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 492exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
493@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
494automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
495port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
496explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
497option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
498be treated as hidden.
499
e1c37eb5
DK
500@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
501@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
502Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
503should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
504into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
505may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
506used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
507the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
508match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
509command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
510of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
511regardless of this option.
512
252b5132
RH
513@cindex dynamic symbol table
514@kindex -E
515@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 516@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
517@item -E
518@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
519@itemx --no-export-dynamic
520When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
521option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
522all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
523set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
524
525If you do not use either of these options (or use the
526@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
527dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
528referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
529
530If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
531back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
532dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
533linking the program itself.
534
55255dae 535You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 536be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 537See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 538
8b747e1a
DK
539Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
540support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
541the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
542
36f63dca 543@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
544@cindex big-endian objects
545@cindex endianness
546@kindex -EB
547@item -EB
548Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
549
550@cindex little-endian objects
551@kindex -EL
552@item -EL
553Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 554@end ifclear
252b5132 555
2509a395
SL
556@kindex -f @var{name}
557@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
558@item -f @var{name}
559@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
560When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
561to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
562table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
563symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
564
565If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
566run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
567the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
568first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
569@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
570in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
571Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
572implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
573machine specific performance.
574
575This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
576will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
577
2509a395
SL
578@kindex -F @var{name}
579@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 580@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 581@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
582When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
583the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
584of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
585on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
586
587If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
588run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
589dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
590filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
591found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
592used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
593@var{name}.
594
ff5dcc92 595Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 596toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
597object files.
598@ifclear SingleFormat
599The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 600@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 601@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
602environment variable.
603@end ifclear
604The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
605creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 606
3dbf70a2 607@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
608@kindex -fini=@var{name}
609@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
610When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
611executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
612address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
613the function to call.
614
252b5132
RH
615@kindex -g
616@item -g
617Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
618
2509a395
SL
619@kindex -G @var{value}
620@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 621@cindex object size
2509a395 622@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
623@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
624Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
625@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
626MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
627sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
628
629@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 630@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 631@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 632@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
633@itemx -soname=@var{name}
634When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
635the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
636which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
637linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
638field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
639
640@kindex -i
641@cindex incremental link
642@item -i
643Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
644
3dbf70a2 645@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
646@kindex -init=@var{name}
647@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
648When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
649executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
650of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
651function to call.
652
252b5132 653@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 654@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 655@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 656@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
657@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
658Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
659list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
660If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 661will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 662will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 663
ff5dcc92 664On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
665files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
666and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
667called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
668@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
669indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
670to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
671@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
672
673The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
674specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
675was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
676command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
677archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
678the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
679
ff5dcc92 680See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
681archives multiple times.
682
683You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
684
685@ifset GENERIC
686This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 687if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
688behaviour of the AIX linker.
689@end ifset
690
691@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 692@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 693@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 694@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 695@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
696Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
697for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
698option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
699in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
700on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 701@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
702order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
703how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
704option is specified.
252b5132 705
9c8ebd6a
DJ
706If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
707by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
708
252b5132
RH
709@ifset UsesEnvVars
710The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 711@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
712some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
713@end ifset
714
715The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
716@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
717at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
718
719@cindex emulation
720@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 721@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
722Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
723emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
724
725If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
726@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
727
728Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
729configured.
730
731@cindex link map
732@kindex -M
733@kindex --print-map
734@item -M
735@itemx --print-map
736Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
737information about the link, including the following:
738
739@itemize @bullet
740@item
3b83e13a 741Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
742@item
743How common symbols are allocated.
744@item
745All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
746which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
747@item
748The values assigned to symbols.
749
750Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
751involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
752have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
753linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
754of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
755the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
756linker script containing:
757
758@smallexample
759 foo = 1
760 foo = foo * 4
761 foo = foo + 8
762@end smallexample
763
764will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
765option is used:
766
767@smallexample
768 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
769 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
771@end smallexample
772
773See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
774scripts.
252b5132
RH
775@end itemize
776
777@kindex -n
778@cindex read-only text
779@cindex NMAGIC
780@kindex --nmagic
781@item -n
782@itemx --nmagic
fa19fce0 783Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
a1ab1d2a 784@code{NMAGIC} if possible.
252b5132
RH
785
786@kindex -N
787@kindex --omagic
788@cindex read/write from cmd line
789@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 790@item -N
252b5132
RH
791@itemx --omagic
792Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
793not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
794libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
795mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
796is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
797specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
798
799@kindex --no-omagic
800@cindex OMAGIC
801@item --no-omagic
802This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
803sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
804be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
805shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
806
807@kindex -o @var{output}
808@kindex --output=@var{output}
809@cindex naming the output file
810@item -o @var{output}
811@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 812Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
813option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
814script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
815
816@kindex -O @var{level}
817@cindex generating optimized output
818@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 819If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 820the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
821should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
822option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
823the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
824no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
825of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 826
a712da20
NC
827@kindex -q
828@kindex --emit-relocs
829@cindex retain relocations in final executable
830@item -q
831@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 832Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
833Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
834order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
835in larger executables.
836
dbab7a7b
NC
837This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
838
4f471f39
RS
839@kindex --force-dynamic
840@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
841@item --force-dynamic
842Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
843to VxWorks targets.
844
252b5132
RH
845@cindex partial link
846@cindex relocatable output
847@kindex -r
1049f94e 848@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 849@item -r
1049f94e 850@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 851Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 852turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
853linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
854magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
855@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 856@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
857If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
858linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
859constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
860
62bf86b4
HPN
861When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
862partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
863relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
864example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
865with input files in other formats at all.
866
252b5132
RH
867This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
868
869@kindex -R @var{file}
870@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
871@cindex symbol-only input
872@item -R @var{filename}
873@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
874Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
875relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
876to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
877programs. You may use this option more than once.
878
ff5dcc92 879For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 880followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 881the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
882
883@kindex -s
884@kindex --strip-all
885@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 886@item -s
252b5132
RH
887@itemx --strip-all
888Omit all symbol information from the output file.
889
890@kindex -S
891@kindex --strip-debug
892@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 893@item -S
252b5132
RH
894@itemx --strip-debug
895Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
896
897@kindex -t
898@kindex --trace
899@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 900@item -t
252b5132 901@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 902Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
903
904@kindex -T @var{script}
905@kindex --script=@var{script}
906@cindex script files
907@item -T @var{scriptfile}
908@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
909Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 910@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 911@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
912output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
913the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
914specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
915options accumulate.
252b5132 916
14be8564
L
917@kindex -dT @var{script}
918@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
919@cindex script files
920@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
921@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
922Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
923
924This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
925processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
926command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
927@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
928behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
929command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
930the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
931@samp{gcc}).
932
252b5132
RH
933@kindex -u @var{symbol}
934@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
935@cindex undefined symbol
936@item -u @var{symbol}
937@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
938Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
939symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
940modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
941different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
942option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
943
944@kindex -Ur
945@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 946@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
947For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
948@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 949turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
950@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
951It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
952with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
953be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
954@samp{-r} for the others.
955
577a0623
AM
956@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
957@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
958Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
959@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
960missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
961specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
962multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
963input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
964in a linker script.
a854a4a7 965
252b5132
RH
966@kindex -v
967@kindex -V
968@kindex --version
969@cindex version
970@item -v
971@itemx --version
972@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 973Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
974lists the supported emulations.
975
976@kindex -x
977@kindex --discard-all
978@cindex deleting local symbols
979@item -x
980@itemx --discard-all
981Delete all local symbols.
982
983@kindex -X
984@kindex --discard-locals
985@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 986@item -X
252b5132 987@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
988Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
989system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
990or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
991
992@kindex -y @var{symbol}
993@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
994@cindex symbol tracing
995@item -y @var{symbol}
996@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
997Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
998option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
999to prepend an underscore.
1000
1001This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1002don't know where the reference is coming from.
1003
1004@kindex -Y @var{path}
1005@item -Y @var{path}
1006Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1007for Solaris compatibility.
1008
1009@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1010@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1011The recognized keywords are:
1012@table @samp
1013
1014@item combreloc
1015Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1016lookup caching possible.
1017
1018@item defs
560e09e9 1019Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1020shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1021
6aa29e7b
JJ
1022@item execstack
1023Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1024
cd6d6c15
NC
1025@item initfirst
1026This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1027It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1028before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1029the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1030the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1031objects.
1032
1033@item interpose
1034Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1035but the primary executable.
1036
5fa222e4
AM
1037@item lazy
1038When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1039dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1040the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1041Lazy binding is the default.
1042
cd6d6c15
NC
1043@item loadfltr
1044Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1045runtime.
1046
1047@item muldefs
1048Allows multiple definitions.
1049
1050@item nocombreloc
1051Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1052
1053@item nocopyreloc
1054Disables production of copy relocs.
1055
1056@item nodefaultlib
1057Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1058ignore any default library search paths.
1059
1060@item nodelete
1061Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1062
1063@item nodlopen
1064Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1065
1066@item nodump
1067Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1068
6aa29e7b
JJ
1069@item noexecstack
1070Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1071
1072@item norelro
1073Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1074
cd6d6c15
NC
1075@item now
1076When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1077dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1078when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1079deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1080first called.
1081
1082@item origin
1083Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1084
6aa29e7b
JJ
1085@item relro
1086Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1087
24718e3b
L
1088@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1089Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1090
1091@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1092Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1093
cd6d6c15
NC
1094@end table
1095
ece2d90e 1096Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1097
1098@kindex -(
1099@cindex groups of archives
1100@item -( @var{archives} -)
1101@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1102The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1103either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1104
1105The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1106references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1107the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1108archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1109object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1110would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1111they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1112resolved.
1113
1114Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1115it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1116more archives.
1117
69da35b5
NC
1118@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1119@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1120@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1121@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1122Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1123recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1124and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1125the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1126behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1127so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1128restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1129
4a43e768
AM
1130@kindex --as-needed
1131@kindex --no-as-needed
1132@item --as-needed
1133@itemx --no-as-needed
1134This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1135on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally,
1136the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1137on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
010e5ae2
AM
1138needed. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be emitted
1139for a library that satisfies a symbol reference from regular objects
1140which is undefined at the point that the library was linked, or, if
1141the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries
1142linked up to that point, a reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1143@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1144
e56f61be
L
1145@kindex --add-needed
1146@kindex --no-add-needed
1147@item --add-needed
1148@itemx --no-add-needed
1149This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF
1150DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line after
1151the @option{--no-add-needed} option. Normally, the linker will add
1152a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags.
1153@option{--no-add-needed} causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted
1154for those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags. @option{--add-needed} restores
1155the default behaviour.
1156
252b5132
RH
1157@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1158@item -assert @var{keyword}
1159This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1160
1161@kindex -Bdynamic
1162@kindex -dy
1163@kindex -call_shared
1164@item -Bdynamic
1165@itemx -dy
1166@itemx -call_shared
1167Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1168for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1169default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1170for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1171multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1172@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1173
a1ab1d2a
UD
1174@kindex -Bgroup
1175@item -Bgroup
1176Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1177section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1178object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1179@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1180only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1181
252b5132
RH
1182@kindex -Bstatic
1183@kindex -dn
1184@kindex -non_shared
1185@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1186@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1187@itemx -dn
1188@itemx -non_shared
1189@itemx -static
1190Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1191platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1192variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1193may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1194library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1195option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1196option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1197shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1198references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1199libraries.
252b5132
RH
1200
1201@kindex -Bsymbolic
1202@item -Bsymbolic
1203When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1204definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1205for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1206within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1207platforms which support shared libraries.
1208
40b36307
L
1209@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1210@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1211When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1212symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1213This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1214libraries.
1215
55255dae
L
1216@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1217@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1218Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1219typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1220global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1221within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1222to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1223in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1224which support shared libraries.
1225
1226The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1227scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1228
40b36307
L
1229@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1230@item --dynamic-list-data
1231Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1232
1233@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1234@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1235Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1236is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1237
0b8a70d9
L
1238@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1239@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1240Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1241
252b5132
RH
1242@kindex --check-sections
1243@kindex --no-check-sections
1244@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1245@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1246Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1247been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1248perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1249suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1250allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1251restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1252Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1253force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1254option.
252b5132
RH
1255
1256@cindex cross reference table
1257@kindex --cref
1258@item --cref
1259Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1260generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1261Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1262
1263The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1264easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1265sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1266symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1267definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1268
4818e05f
AM
1269@cindex common allocation
1270@kindex --no-define-common
1271@item --no-define-common
1272This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1273The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1274@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1275
1276The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1277the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1278of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1279forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1280Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1281from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1282This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1283and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1284duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1285paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1286
252b5132 1287@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1288@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1289@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1290Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1291address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1292times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1293limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1294context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1295symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1296constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1297using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1298Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1299space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1300@var{expression}.
1301
1302@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1303@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1304@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1305@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1306@itemx --no-demangle
1307These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1308and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1309present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1310underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1311mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1312different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1313to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1314demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1315is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1316
1317@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1318@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1319@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1320@item -I@var{file}
1321@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1322Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1323generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1324linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1325doing.
1326
7ce691ae 1327@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1328@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1329@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1330@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1331Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1332with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1333
252b5132
RH
1334@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1335@item --force-exe-suffix
1336Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1337
1338If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1339@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1340the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1341option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1342Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1343it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1344
1345@kindex --gc-sections
1346@kindex --no-gc-sections
1347@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1348@item --gc-sections
1349@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1350Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1351targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1352performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1353@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1354
d5465ba2
AM
1355@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1356examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1357symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1358command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1359referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1360libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1361referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1362the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1363relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1364
ac69cbc6
TG
1365This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1366@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitely
1367specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1368a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1369
c17d87de
NC
1370@kindex --print-gc-sections
1371@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1372@cindex garbage collection
1373@item --print-gc-sections
1374@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1375List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1376printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1377collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1378default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1379be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1380line.
1381
252b5132
RH
1382@cindex help
1383@cindex usage
1384@kindex --help
1385@item --help
1386Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1387
ea20a7da
CC
1388@kindex --target-help
1389@item --target-help
1390Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1391
2509a395
SL
1392@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1393@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1394Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1395@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1396
1397@cindex memory usage
1398@kindex --no-keep-memory
1399@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1400@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1401symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1402instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1403necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1404while linking a large executable.
1405
1406@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1407@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1408@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1409@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1410Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1411is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1412The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1413behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1414libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1415
aa713662
L
1416@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1417@kindex -z muldefs
1418@item --allow-multiple-definition
1419@itemx -z muldefs
1420Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1421report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1422first definition will be used.
1423
b79e8c78 1424@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1425@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1426@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1427@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1428Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1429This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1430determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1431shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1432how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1433
903249d7
NC
1434The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1435referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1436an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1437a shared library.
1438
1439The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1440libraries specified at link time are that:
1441
1442@itemize @bullet
1443@item
1444A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1445that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1446resolvable at load time.
1447@item
1448There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1449symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1450
1451The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1452select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1453architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1454appropriate memset function.
1455@end itemize
b79e8c78 1456
31941635
L
1457@kindex --no-undefined-version
1458@item --no-undefined-version
1459Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1460it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1461will be issued instead.
1462
3e3b46e5
PB
1463@kindex --default-symver
1464@item --default-symver
1465Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1466exported symbols.
1467
1468@kindex --default-imported-symver
1469@item --default-imported-symver
1470Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1471imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1472
252b5132
RH
1473@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1474@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1475Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1476files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1477been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1478This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1479errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1480have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1481inappropriate.
1482
fe7929ce
AM
1483@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1484@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1485Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1486library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1487
252b5132
RH
1488@kindex --no-whole-archive
1489@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1490Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1491archive files.
1492
1493@cindex output file after errors
1494@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1495@item --noinhibit-exec
1496Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1497Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1498errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1499when it issues any error whatsoever.
1500
0a9c1c8e
CD
1501@kindex -nostdlib
1502@item -nostdlib
1503Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1504command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1505(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1506
252b5132 1507@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1508@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1509@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1510@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1511file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1512@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1513object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1514object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1515should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1516usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1517name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1518list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1519command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1520this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1521@end ifclear
1522
36af4a4e
JJ
1523@kindex -pie
1524@kindex --pic-executable
1525@item -pie
1526@itemx --pic-executable
1527@cindex position independent executables
1528Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1529ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1530libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1531address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1532normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1533defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1534
252b5132
RH
1535@kindex -qmagic
1536@item -qmagic
1537This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1538
1539@kindex -Qy
1540@item -Qy
1541This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1542
1543@kindex --relax
1544@cindex synthesizing linker
1545@cindex relaxing addressing modes
1546@item --relax
a1ab1d2a 1547An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1548@ifset GENERIC
1549This option is only supported on a few targets.
1550@end ifset
1551@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1552@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1553@end ifset
1554@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1555@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1556@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1557@ifset XTENSA
1558@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1559@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1560@ifset M68HC11
1561@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1562@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1563@ifset POWERPC
1564@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1565@end ifset
252b5132
RH
1566
1567On some platforms, the @samp{--relax} option performs global
1568optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves addressing
1569in the program, such as relaxing address modes and synthesizing new
1570instructions in the output object file.
1571
1572On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1573debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1574@ifset GENERIC
1575This is known to be
1576the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300 family of processors.
1577@end ifset
1578
1579@ifset GENERIC
1580On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1581but ignored.
1582@end ifset
1583
1584@cindex retaining specified symbols
1585@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1586@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1587@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1588@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1589Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1590discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1591symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1592@ifset GENERIC
1593(such as VxWorks)
1594@end ifset
1595where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1596run-time memory.
1597
1598@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1599or symbols needed for relocations.
1600
1601You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1602line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1603
1604@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1605@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1606@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1607@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1608Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1609linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1610arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1611them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1612also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1613objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1614@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1615ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1616@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1617
ff5dcc92 1618The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1619SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1620@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1621runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1622options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1623gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1624file systems.
252b5132 1625
ff5dcc92 1626For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1627followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1628the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1629@end ifset
1630
1631@ifset GENERIC
1632@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1633@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1634@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1635When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1636happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1637of the input files.
1638
1639When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1640non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1641shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1642explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1643specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1644@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1645either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1646appearing multiple times.
1647
28c309a2
NC
1648This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1649that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1650is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1651runtime linker would do.
1652
252b5132 1653The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1654libraries:
252b5132
RH
1655@enumerate
1656@item
ff5dcc92 1657Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1658@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1659Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1660between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1661specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1662used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1663at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1664by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1665the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1666@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1667On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1668@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1669environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1670@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1671On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1672directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1673@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1674For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1675variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1676@item
ec4eb78a
L
1677For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1678@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1679libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1680@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1681@item
252b5132
RH
1682The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1683@item
1684For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1685exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1686@end enumerate
1687
1688If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1689warning and continue with the link.
1690@end ifset
1691
1692@kindex -shared
1693@kindex -Bshareable
1694@item -shared
1695@itemx -Bshareable
1696@cindex shared libraries
1697Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1698and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1699shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1700undefined symbols in the link.
1701
252b5132 1702@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1703@item --sort-common
1704@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1705@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1706This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1707ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1708sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1709eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1710between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1711specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1712
2509a395
SL
1713@kindex --sort-section=name
1714@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1715This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1716patterns in the linker script.
1717
2509a395
SL
1718@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1719@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1720This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1721patterns in the linker script.
1722
252b5132 1723@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1724@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1725Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1726each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1727size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1728
1729@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1730@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1731Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1732output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1733This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1734certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1735cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1736that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1737support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1738input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1739more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1740many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1741
1742@kindex --stats
1743@item --stats
1744Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1745as execution time and memory usage.
1746
2509a395 1747@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1748@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1749Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1750configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1751that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1752
252b5132
RH
1753@kindex --traditional-format
1754@cindex traditional format
1755@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1756For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1757the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1758use the traditional format instead.
1759
1760@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1761For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1762symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1763full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1764@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1765trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1766combine duplicate entries.
1767
2509a395
SL
1768@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1769@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1770Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1771address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1772times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1773line.
1774@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1775for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1776@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1777should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1778sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1779
2509a395
SL
1780@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1781@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1782@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1783@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1784@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1785@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1786@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1787Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1788@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1789
2509a395
SL
1790@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1791@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1792@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1793When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1794of the first byte of the text segment.
1795
560e09e9
NC
1796@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1797@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1798Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1799values for @samp{method}:
1800
1801@table @samp
1802@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1803Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1804
1805@item report-all
da8bce14 1806Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1807
1808@item ignore-in-object-files
1809Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1810ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1811
1812@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1813Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1814ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1815when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1816libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1817command line.
1818@end table
1819
1820The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1821by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1822
1823Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1824unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1825can change this to a warning.
1826
252b5132
RH
1827@kindex --verbose
1828@cindex verbose
1829@item --dll-verbose
308b1ffd 1830@itemx --verbose
ff5dcc92 1831Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1832supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
b9a8de1e 1833the linker script being used by the linker.
252b5132
RH
1834
1835@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1836@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1837@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1838Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1839used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1840about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1841is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1842see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1843use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1844symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1845@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1846
7ce691ae 1847@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1848@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1849@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1850@item --warn-common
1851Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1852a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1853but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1854you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1855Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1856warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1857
1858There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1859
1860@table @samp
1861@item int i = 1;
1862A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1863file.
1864
1865@item extern int i;
1866An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1867There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1868variable somewhere.
1869
1870@item int i;
1871A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1872variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1873The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1874single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1875size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1876a definition of the same variable.
1877@end table
1878
1879The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1880Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1881just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1882encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1883a common symbol.
1884
1885@enumerate
1886@item
1887Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1888definition for the symbol.
1889@smallexample
1890@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1891 overridden by definition
1892@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1893@end smallexample
1894
1895@item
1896Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1897the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1898except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1899@smallexample
1900@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1901 overriding common
1902@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1903@end smallexample
1904
1905@item
1906Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1907@smallexample
1908@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1909 of `@var{symbol}'
1910@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1911@end smallexample
1912
1913@item
1914Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1915@smallexample
1916@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1917 overridden by larger common
1918@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1919@end smallexample
1920
1921@item
1922Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1923the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1924encountered in a different order.
1925@smallexample
1926@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1927 overriding smaller common
1928@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1929@end smallexample
1930@end enumerate
1931
1932@kindex --warn-constructors
1933@item --warn-constructors
1934Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1935object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1936detect the use of global constructors.
1937
1938@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1939@item --warn-multiple-gp
1940Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1941This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1942Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1943section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1944of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1945base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1946base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1947bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1948large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1949values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1950option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1951
1952@kindex --warn-once
1953@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1954@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1955@item --warn-once
1956Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1957which refers to it.
1958
1959@kindex --warn-section-align
1960@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1961@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1962@item --warn-section-align
1963Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1964alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1965The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1966is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1967the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1968
8fdd7217
NC
1969@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1970@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 1971Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 1972
a0c402a5
L
1973@kindex --warn-alternate-em
1974@item --warn-alternate-em
1975Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
1976
560e09e9
NC
1977@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
1978@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
1979If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
1980@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
1981This option makes it generate a warning instead.
1982
1983@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
1984@item --error-unresolved-symbols
1985This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
1986it is reporting unresolved symbols.
1987
252b5132
RH
1988@kindex --whole-archive
1989@cindex including an entire archive
1990@item --whole-archive
1991For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 1992@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
1993in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
1994files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
1995library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
1996library. This option may be used more than once.
1997
7ec229ce 1998Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
1999about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2000Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2001list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2002your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2003
2509a395
SL
2004@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2005@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2006Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2007@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2008undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2009@var{symbol}.
2010
2011This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2012wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2013wishes to call the system function, it should call
2014@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2015
2016Here is a trivial example:
2017
2018@smallexample
2019void *
cc2f008e 2020__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2021@{
cc2f008e 2022 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2023 return __real_malloc (c);
2024@}
2025@end smallexample
2026
ff5dcc92 2027If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2028all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2029instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2030call the real @code{malloc} function.
2031
2032You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2033links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2034you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2035file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2036call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2037
6aa29e7b
JJ
2038@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2039@item --eh-frame-hdr
2040Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2041@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2042
6c1439be
L
2043@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2044@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2045@item --enable-new-dtags
2046@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2047This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2048systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
2049@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2050If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2051created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2052those options are only available for ELF systems.
2053
2d643429 2054@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2055@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2056Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2057close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2058time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2059increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2060value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2061
fdc90cb4
JJ
2062@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2063@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2064Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2065@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2066new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2067the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2068hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2069
35835446
JR
2070@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2071@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2072This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2073linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2074for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2075about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2076
4f9c04f7 2077Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 20781021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2079run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2080has been used.
2081
2082The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2083enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2084
c0065db7
RM
2085@kindex --build-id
2086@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2087@item --build-id
2088@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2089Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2090The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2091file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2092@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2093parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2094@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2095@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2096an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2097characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2098omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2099
2100The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2101that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2102unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2103to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2104file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2105string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2106
2107Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2108@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2109@end table
2110
0285c67d
NC
2111@c man end
2112
36f63dca 2113@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2114
0285c67d
NC
2115@c man begin OPTIONS
2116
ff5dcc92 2117The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2118the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2119normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2120use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2121@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2122like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2123symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2124object file).
2125
2126In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2127support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2128PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2129values by either a space or an equals sign.
2130
ff5dcc92 2131@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2132
2133@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2134@item --add-stdcall-alias
2135If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2136as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2137[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2138
2139@kindex --base-file
2140@item --base-file @var{file}
2141Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2142addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2143@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2144[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2145
2146@kindex --dll
2147@item --dll
2148Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2149@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2150file.
bb10df36 2151[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2152
88183869
DK
2153@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2154@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2155@item --enable-long-section-names
2156@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2157The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2158the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2159for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2160fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2161to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2162allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2163disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2164generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2165as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
3efd345c
DK
2166with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2167GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2168information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2169option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2170section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2171when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2172image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2173[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2174
252b5132
RH
2175@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2176@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2177@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2178@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2179If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2180do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2181only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2182resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2183undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2184@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2185to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2186warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2187import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2188to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2189feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2190@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2191mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2192[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2193
2194@cindex DLLs, creating
2195@kindex --export-all-symbols
2196@item --export-all-symbols
2197If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2198be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2199otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2200explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2201attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2202option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2203@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2204@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2205exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2206re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2207such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2208@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2209@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2210Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2211not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2212extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2213(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2214These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2215@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2216@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2217@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2218@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2219[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2220
2221@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2222@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2223Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2224exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2225[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2226
2227@kindex --file-alignment
2228@item --file-alignment
2229Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2230file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2231512.
bb10df36 2232[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2233
2234@cindex heap size
2235@kindex --heap
2236@item --heap @var{reserve}
2237@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2238Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2239to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2240committed.
bb10df36 2241[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2242
2243@cindex image base
2244@kindex --image-base
2245@item --image-base @var{value}
2246Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2247the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2248is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2249your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2250other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2251for dlls.
bb10df36 2252[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2253
2254@kindex --kill-at
2255@item --kill-at
2256If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2257symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2258[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2259
26d2d8a2
BF
2260@kindex --large-address-aware
2261@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2262If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2263header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2264greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2265or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2266section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2267[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2268
252b5132
RH
2269@kindex --major-image-version
2270@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2271Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2272[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2273
2274@kindex --major-os-version
2275@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2276Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2277[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2278
2279@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2280@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2281Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2282[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2283
2284@kindex --minor-image-version
2285@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2286Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2287[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2288
2289@kindex --minor-os-version
2290@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2291Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2292[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2293
2294@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2295@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2296Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2297[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2298
2299@cindex DEF files, creating
2300@cindex DLLs, creating
2301@kindex --output-def
2302@item --output-def @var{file}
2303The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2304file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2305(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2306library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2307automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2308[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2309
b044cda1
CW
2310@cindex DLLs, creating
2311@kindex --out-implib
2312@item --out-implib @var{file}
2313The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2314import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2315import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2316may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2317makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2318creation step.
bb10df36 2319[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2320
2321@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2322@item --enable-auto-image-base
2323Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2324using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2325from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2326collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2327avoided.
bb10df36 2328[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2329
2330@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2331@item --disable-auto-image-base
2332Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2333user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2334default.
bb10df36 2335[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2336
2337@cindex DLLs, linking to
2338@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2339@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2340When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2341search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2342@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2343between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2344uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2345@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2346[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2347
2348@kindex --enable-auto-import
2349@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2350Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2351DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2352building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2353'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2354to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2355specification published by Microsoft.
2356
e2a83dd0
NC
2357Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2358data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2359placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2360around a problem with consts that is described here:
2361http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2362
4d8907ac
DS
2363Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2364see this message:
0d888aac 2365
ece2d90e 2366"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2367documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2368
ece2d90e
NC
2369This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2370ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2371allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2372fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2373constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2374multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2375this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2376of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2377the warning, and exit.
2378
2379There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2380data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2381
2fa9fc65
NC
2382One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2383of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2384this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2385
c0065db7
RM
2386A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2387that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2388there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2389a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2390
2391@example
2392extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2393extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2394 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2395@end example
2396
2397or
2398
2399@example
2400extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2401extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2402 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2403@end example
2404
c0065db7 2405For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2406is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2407
2408@example
2409extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2410extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2411 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2412@end example
2413
c406afaf
NC
2414or
2415
2416@example
2417extern long long extern_ll;
2418extern_ll -->
2419 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2420@end example
2421
2fa9fc65 2422A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2423'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2424@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2425requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2426building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2427merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2428between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2429constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2430
2431Original:
2432@example
2433--foo.h
2434extern int arr[];
2435--foo.c
2436#include "foo.h"
2437void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2438 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2439@}
2440@end example
2441
2442Solution 1:
2443@example
2444--foo.h
2445extern int arr[];
2446--foo.c
2447#include "foo.h"
2448void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2449 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2450 volatile int *parr = arr;
2451 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2452@}
2453@end example
2454
2455Solution 2:
2456@example
2457--foo.h
2458/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2459#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2460 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2461#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2462#else
2463#define FOO_IMPORT
2464#endif
2465extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2466--foo.c
2467#include "foo.h"
2468void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2469 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2470@}
2471@end example
2472
c0065db7 2473A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2474library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2475for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2476functions).
bb10df36 2477[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2478
2479@kindex --disable-auto-import
2480@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2481Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2482@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2483[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2484
2fa9fc65
NC
2485@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2486@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2487If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2488that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2489a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2490environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2491[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2492
2493@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2494@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2495Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2496DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2497[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2498
b044cda1
CW
2499@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2500@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2501Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2502[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2503
252b5132
RH
2504@kindex --section-alignment
2505@item --section-alignment
2506Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2507addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2508[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2509
2510@cindex stack size
2511@kindex --stack
2512@item --stack @var{reserve}
2513@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2514Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2515to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2516committed.
bb10df36 2517[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2518
2519@kindex --subsystem
2520@item --subsystem @var{which}
2521@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2522@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2523Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2524legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2525@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2526the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2527@var{which}.
bb10df36 2528[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2529
2f563b51
DK
2530The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2531of the PE file header:
2532[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2533
2534@kindex --dynamicbase
2535@item --dynamicbase
2536The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2537randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2538Vista for i386 PE targets.
2539
2540@kindex --forceinteg
2541@item --forceinteg
2542Code integrity checks are enforced.
2543
2544@kindex --nxcompat
2545@item --nxcompat
2546The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2547This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2548
2549@kindex --no-isolation
2550@item --no-isolation
2551Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2552
2553@kindex --no-seh
2554@item --no-seh
2555The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2556this image.
2557
2558@kindex --no-bind
2559@item --no-bind
2560Do not bind this image.
2561
2562@kindex --wdmdriver
2563@item --wdmdriver
2564The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2565
2566@kindex --tsaware
2567@item --tsaware
2568The image is Terminal Server aware.
2569
252b5132
RH
2570@end table
2571
0285c67d
NC
2572@c man end
2573
93fd0973
SC
2574@ifset M68HC11
2575@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2576
2577@c man begin OPTIONS
2578
2579The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2580memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2581
2582@table @gcctabopt
2583
2584@kindex --no-trampoline
2585@item --no-trampoline
2586This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2587is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2588instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2589
2590@kindex --bank-window
2591@item --bank-window @var{name}
2592This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2593the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2594The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2595paging and addresses within the memory window.
2596
2597@end table
2598
2599@c man end
2600@end ifset
2601
7fb9f789
NC
2602@ifset M68K
2603@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2604
2605@c man begin OPTIONS
2606
2607The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2608when linking for 68K targets.
2609
2610@table @gcctabopt
2611
2612@kindex --got
2613@item --got=@var{type}
2614This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2615@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2616@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2617Info entry for @file{ld}.
2618
2619@end table
2620
2621@c man end
2622@end ifset
2623
252b5132
RH
2624@ifset UsesEnvVars
2625@node Environment
2626@section Environment Variables
2627
0285c67d
NC
2628@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2629
560e09e9 2630You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2631@ifclear SingleFormat
2632@code{GNUTARGET},
2633@end ifclear
2634@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2635
36f63dca 2636@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2637@kindex GNUTARGET
2638@cindex default input format
2639@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2640use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2641of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2642@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2643of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2644attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2645this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2646there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2647object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2648BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2649in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2650@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2651
2652@kindex LDEMULATION
2653@cindex default emulation
2654@cindex emulation, default
2655@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2656@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2657behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2658available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2659the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2660variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2661linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2662
2663@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2664@cindex demangling, default
2665Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2666@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2667default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2668a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2669may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2670options.
2671
0285c67d
NC
2672@c man end
2673@end ifset
2674
252b5132
RH
2675@node Scripts
2676@chapter Linker Scripts
2677
2678@cindex scripts
2679@cindex linker scripts
2680@cindex command files
2681Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2682written in the linker command language.
2683
2684The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2685the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2686the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2687more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2688direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2689described below.
2690
2691The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2692yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2693linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2694to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2695such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2696
2697You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2698line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2699default linker script.
2700
2701You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2702to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2703Linker Scripts}.
2704
2705@menu
2706* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2707* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2708* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2709* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2710* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2711* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2712* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2713* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2714* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2715* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2716* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2717@end menu
2718
2719@node Basic Script Concepts
2720@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2721@cindex linker script concepts
2722We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2723describe the linker script language.
2724
2725The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2726file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2727@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2728The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2729purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2730among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2731section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2732in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2733
2734Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2735also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2736contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2737the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2738A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2739area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2740loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2741which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2742of debugging information.
2743
2744Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2745first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2746the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2747@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2748section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2749same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2750is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2751(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2752based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2753RAM address would be the VMA.
2754
2755You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2756program with the @samp{-h} option.
2757
2758Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2759@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2760has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2761information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2762will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2763static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2764referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2765
2766You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2767program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2768option.
2769
2770@node Script Format
2771@section Linker Script Format
2772@cindex linker script format
2773Linker scripts are text files.
2774
2775You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2776either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2777symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2778generally ignored.
2779
2780Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2781If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2782otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2783double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2784file name.
2785
2786You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2787@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2788to whitespace.
2789
2790@node Simple Example
2791@section Simple Linker Script Example
2792@cindex linker script example
2793@cindex example of linker script
2794Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2795
2796The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2797@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2798memory layout of the output file.
2799
2800The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2801describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2802code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2803@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2804Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2805your input files.
2806
2807For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
28080x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2809linker script which will do that:
2810@smallexample
2811SECTIONS
2812@{
2813 . = 0x10000;
2814 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2815 . = 0x8000000;
2816 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2817 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2818@}
2819@end smallexample
2820
2821You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2822followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2823descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2824
252b5132
RH
2825The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2826sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2827counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2828other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2829current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2830incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2831@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2832
2833The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2834required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2835after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2836which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2837wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2838means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2839
2840Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2841@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2842@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2843
2844The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2845the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2846at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2847output section, the value of the location counter will be
2848@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2849effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2850immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2851
2852The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2853alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2854example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2855sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2856may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2857sections.
2858
2859That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2860
2861@node Simple Commands
2862@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2863@cindex linker script simple commands
2864In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2865
2866@menu
2867* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2868* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2869@ifclear SingleFormat
2870* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2871@end ifclear
2872
4a93e180 2873* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2874* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2875@end menu
2876
2877@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2878@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2879@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2880@cindex start of execution
2881@cindex first instruction
2882@cindex entry point
2883The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2884point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2885entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2886@smallexample
2887ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2888@end smallexample
2889
2890There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2891entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2892stopping when one of them succeeds:
2893@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2894@item
252b5132 2895the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2896@item
252b5132 2897the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2898@item
252b5132 2899the value of the symbol @code{start}, if defined;
a1ab1d2a 2900@item
252b5132 2901the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2902@item
252b5132
RH
2903The address @code{0}.
2904@end itemize
2905
2906@node File Commands
36f63dca 2907@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2908@cindex linker script file commands
2909Several linker script commands deal with files.
2910
2911@table @code
2912@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2913@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2914@cindex including a linker script
2915Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2916be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 2917with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
291810 levels deep.
2919
4006703d
NS
2920You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2921@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2922
252b5132
RH
2923@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2924@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2925@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2926@cindex input files in linker scripts
2927@cindex input object files in linker scripts
2928@cindex linker script input object files
2929The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2930in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2931
2932For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2933a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2934then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2935
2936In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2937script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2938
e3f2db7f
AO
2939In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2940with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2941located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2942for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2943open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2944linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2945description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 2946
ff5dcc92 2947If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
2948name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2949@samp{-l}.
2950
2951When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2952files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2953script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2954
2955@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2956@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2957@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
2958@cindex grouping input files
2959The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
2960files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
2961new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
2962in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
2963
b717d30e
JJ
2964@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2965@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2966@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
2967This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
2968commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
2969as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
2970with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
2971when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
2972@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
2973and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
2974setting afterwards.
2975
252b5132
RH
2976@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
2977@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 2978@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
2979The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
2980@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
2981@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
2982Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
2983precedence.
2984
2985You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
2986output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
2987
2988@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2989@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2990@cindex library search path in linker script
2991@cindex archive search path in linker script
2992@cindex search path in linker script
2993The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 2994@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
2995@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
2996on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
2997are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
2998the command line option are searched first.
2999
3000@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3001@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3002@cindex first input file
3003The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3004that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3005though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3006when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3007first file.
3008@end table
3009
3010@ifclear SingleFormat
3011@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3012@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3013A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3014
3015@table @code
3016@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3017@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3018@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3019@cindex output file format in linker script
3020The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3021output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3022exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3023(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3024line option takes precedence.
3025
3026You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3027formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3028This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3029desired endianness.
3030
3031If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3032will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3033output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3034used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3035
3036For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3037command:
3038@smallexample
3039OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3040@end smallexample
3041This says that the default format for the output file is
3042@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3043option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3044format.
3045
3046@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3047@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3048@cindex input file format in linker script
3049The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3050files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3051This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3052(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3053is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3054command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3055@end table
3056@end ifclear
3057
4a93e180
NC
3058@node REGION_ALIAS
3059@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3060@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3061@cindex region alias
3062@cindex region names
3063
3064Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3065@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3066
3067@smallexample
3068REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3069@end smallexample
3070
3071The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3072memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3073to memory regions. An example follows.
3074
3075Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3076memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3077that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3078non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3079access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3080read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3081sections:
3082
3083@itemize @bullet
3084@item
3085@code{.text} program code;
3086@item
3087@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3088@item
3089@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3090@item
3091@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3092@end itemize
3093
3094The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3095part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3096output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3097systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3098@code{C}:
3099@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3100@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3101@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3102@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3103@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3104@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3105@end multitable
3106The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3107loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3108the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3109the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3110
3111The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3112includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3113memory layout:
3114@smallexample
3115INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3116
3117SECTIONS
3118 @{
3119 .text :
3120 @{
3121 *(.text)
3122 @} > REGION_TEXT
3123 .rodata :
3124 @{
3125 *(.rodata)
3126 rodata_end = .;
3127 @} > REGION_RODATA
3128 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3129 @{
3130 data_start = .;
3131 *(.data)
3132 @} > REGION_DATA
3133 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3134 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3135 .bss :
3136 @{
3137 *(.bss)
3138 @} > REGION_BSS
3139 @}
3140@end smallexample
3141
3142Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3143regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3144variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3145@table @code
3146@item A
3147Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3148@smallexample
3149MEMORY
3150 @{
3151 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3152 @}
3153
3154REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3155REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3156REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3157REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3158@end smallexample
3159@item B
3160Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3161into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3162@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3163@smallexample
3164MEMORY
3165 @{
3166 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3167 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3168 @}
3169
3170REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3171REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3172REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3173REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3174@end smallexample
3175@item C
3176Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3177@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3178initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3179system start into the @code{RAM}.
3180@smallexample
3181MEMORY
3182 @{
3183 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3184 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3185 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3186 @}
3187
3188REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3189REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3190REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3191REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3192@end smallexample
3193@end table
3194
3195It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3196@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3197necessary:
3198@smallexample
3199#include <string.h>
3200
3201extern char data_start [];
3202extern char data_size [];
3203extern char data_load_start [];
3204
3205void copy_data(void)
3206@{
3207 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3208 @{
3209 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3210 @}
3211@}
3212@end smallexample
3213
252b5132 3214@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3215@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3216There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3217
3218@table @code
3219@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3220@kindex ASSERT
3221@cindex assertion in linker script
3222Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3223with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3224
3225@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3226@kindex EXTERN
3227@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3228Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3229symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3230modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3231each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3232command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3233
3234@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3235@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3236@cindex common allocation in linker script
3237This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3238to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3239output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3240
4818e05f
AM
3241@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3242@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3243@cindex common allocation in linker script
3244This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3245command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3246to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3247
53d25da6
AM
3248@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3249@kindex INSERT
3250@cindex insert user script into default script
3251This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3252augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3253inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3254@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3255default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3256sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3257linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3258insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3259linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3260default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3261of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3262to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3263is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3264
3265@smallexample
3266SECTIONS
3267@{
3268 OVERLAY :
3269 @{
3270 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3271 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3272 @}
3273@}
3274INSERT AFTER .text;
3275@end smallexample
3276
252b5132
RH
3277@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3278@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3279@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3280This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3281references among certain output sections.
3282
3283In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3284using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3285will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3286errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3287a function defined in the other section.
3288
3289The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3290@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3291an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3292@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3293names.
3294
3295@ifclear SingleFormat
3296@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3297@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3298@cindex machine architecture
3299@cindex architecture
3300Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3301of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3302architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3303the @samp{-f} option.
3304@end ifclear
3305@end table
3306
3307@node Assignments
3308@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3309@cindex assignment in scripts
3310@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3311@cindex variables, defining
3312You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3313the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3314
3315@menu
3316* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3317* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3318* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3319* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3320@end menu
3321
3322@node Simple Assignments
3323@subsection Simple Assignments
3324
3325You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3326
3327@table @code
3328@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3329@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3330@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3331@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3332@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3333@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3334@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3335@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3336@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3337@end table
3338
3339The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3340@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3341defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3342
3343The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3344may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3345
3346The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3347
3348Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3349
3350You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3351statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3352section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3353
3354The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3355expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3356
3357Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3358assignments may be used:
3359
3360@smallexample
3361floating_point = 0;
3362SECTIONS
3363@{
3364 .text :
3365 @{
3366 *(.text)
3367 _etext = .;
3368 @}
156e34dd 3369 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3370 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3371@}
3372@end smallexample
3373@noindent
3374In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3375zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3376the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3377defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3378upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3379
3380@node PROVIDE
3381@subsection PROVIDE
3382@cindex PROVIDE
3383In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3384only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3385the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3386@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3387@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3388@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3389@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3390@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3391
3392Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3393@smallexample
3394SECTIONS
3395@{
3396 .text :
3397 @{
3398 *(.text)
3399 _etext = .;
3400 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3401 @}
3402@}
3403@end smallexample
3404
3405In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3406underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3407the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3408underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3409If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3410linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3411
7af8e998
L
3412@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3413@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3414@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3415Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3416hidden and won't be exported.
3417
73ae6183
NC
3418@node Source Code Reference
3419@subsection Source Code Reference
3420
3421Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3422intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3423a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3424symbol that does not have a value.
3425
3426Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3427transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3428stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3429prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3430mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3431of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3432variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3433linker script variable might be referred to as:
3434
3435@smallexample
3436 extern int foo;
3437@end smallexample
3438
3439But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3440
3441@smallexample
3442 _foo = 1000;
3443@end smallexample
3444
3445In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3446transformation has taken place.
3447
3448When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3449things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3450in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3451second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3452table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3453contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3454value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3455
3456@smallexample
3457 int foo = 1000;
3458@end smallexample
3459
3460creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3461holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3462number 1000 is initially stored.
3463
3464When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3465first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3466memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3467So:
3468
3469@smallexample
3470 foo = 1;
3471@end smallexample
3472
3473looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3474associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3475address. Whereas:
3476
3477@smallexample
3478 int * a = & foo;
3479@end smallexample
3480
3481looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3482and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3483the variable @samp{a}.
3484
3485Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3486the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3487an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3488
3489@smallexample
3490 foo = 1000;
3491@end smallexample
3492
3493creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3494the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3495address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3496linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3497access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3498
3499Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3500you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3501use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3502section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3503linker script contains these declarations:
3504
3505@smallexample
3506@group
3507 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3508 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3509 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3510@end group
3511@end smallexample
3512
3513Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3514
3515@smallexample
3516@group
3517 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3518
73ae6183
NC
3519 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3520@end group
3521@end smallexample
3522
3523Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3524
252b5132 3525@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3526@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3527@kindex SECTIONS
3528The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3529into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3530
3531The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3532@smallexample
3533SECTIONS
3534@{
3535 @var{sections-command}
3536 @var{sections-command}
3537 @dots{}
3538@}
3539@end smallexample
3540
3541Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3542
3543@itemize @bullet
3544@item
3545an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3546@item
3547a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3548@item
3549an output section description
3550@item
3551an overlay description
3552@end itemize
3553
3554The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3555@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3556those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3557understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3558the layout of the output file.
3559
3560Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3561below.
3562
3563If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3564linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3565section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3566input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3567example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3568in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3569
3570@menu
3571* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3572* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3573* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3574* Input Section:: Input section description
3575* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3576* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3577* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3578* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3579* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3580@end menu
3581
3582@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3583@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3584The full description of an output section looks like this:
3585@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3586@group
7e7d5768 3587@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
3588 [AT(@var{lma})]
3589 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3590 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3591 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3592 @{
3593 @var{output-section-command}
3594 @var{output-section-command}
3595 @dots{}
562d3460 3596 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3597@end group
3598@end smallexample
3599
3600Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3601
3602The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3603name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3604The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3605
3606Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3607
3608@itemize @bullet
3609@item
3610a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3611@item
3612an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3613@item
3614data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3615@item
3616a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3617@end itemize
3618
3619@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3620@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3621@cindex name, section
3622@cindex section name
3623The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3624meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3625support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3626must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3627example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3628output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3629names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3630quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3631characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3632commas must be quoted.
3633
3634The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3635Discarding}.
3636
3637@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3638@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3639@cindex address, section
3640@cindex section address
3641The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3642address) of the output section. If you do not provide @var{address},
3643the linker will set it based on @var{region} if present, or otherwise
3644based on the current value of the location counter.
3645
3646If you provide @var{address}, the address of the output section will be
3647set to precisely that. If you provide neither @var{address} nor
3648@var{region}, then the address of the output section will be set to the
3649current value of the location counter aligned to the alignment
3650requirements of the output section. The alignment requirement of the
3651output section is the strictest alignment of any input section contained
3652within the output section.
3653
3654For example,
3655@smallexample
3656.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3657@end smallexample
3658@noindent
3659and
3660@smallexample
3661.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3662@end smallexample
3663@noindent
3664are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3665@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3666counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3667counter aligned to the strictest alignment of a @samp{.text} input
3668section.
3669
3670The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3671For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3672so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3673do something like this:
3674@smallexample
3675.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3676@end smallexample
3677@noindent
3678This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3679aligned upward to the specified value.
3680
3681Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3682location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3683sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3684
3685@node Input Section
36f63dca 3686@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3687@cindex input sections
3688@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3689The most common output section command is an input section description.
3690
3691The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3692You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3693in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3694map the input files into your memory layout.
3695
3696@menu
3697* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3698* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3699* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3700* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3701* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3702@end menu
3703
3704@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3705@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3706@cindex input section basics
3707An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3708by a list of section names in parentheses.
3709
3710The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3711describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3712
3713The most common input section description is to include all input
3714sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3715include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3716@smallexample
3717*(.text)
3718@end smallexample
3719@noindent
18625d54
CM
3720Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3721of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3722match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3723example:
252b5132 3724@smallexample
b4346c09 3725*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3726@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3727will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3728@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3729
3730There are two ways to include more than one section:
3731@smallexample
3732*(.text .rdata)
3733*(.text) *(.rdata)
3734@end smallexample
3735@noindent
3736The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3737@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3738first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3739they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3740@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3741@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3742
3743You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3744You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3745needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3746@smallexample
3747data.o(.data)
3748@end smallexample
3749
967928e9
AM
3750You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3751matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3752with no whitespace around the colon.
3753
3754@table @samp
3755@item archive:file
3756matches file within archive
3757@item archive:
3758matches the whole archive
3759@item :file
3760matches file but not one in an archive
3761@end table
3762
3763Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3764wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3765single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3766@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3767within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3768also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3769other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3770from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3771command.
3772
252b5132
RH
3773If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3774the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3775commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3776@smallexample
3777data.o
3778@end smallexample
3779
967928e9
AM
3780When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3781and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3782characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3783name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3784did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3785though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3786@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3787the archive search path.
3788
3789@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3790@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3791@cindex input section wildcards
3792@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3793@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3794@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3795In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3796name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3797
3798The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3799pattern for the file name.
3800
3801The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3802
3803@table @samp
3804@item *
3805matches any number of characters
3806@item ?
3807matches any single character
3808@item [@var{chars}]
3809matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3810character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3811@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3812@item \
3813quotes the following character
3814@end table
3815
3816When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3817will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3818Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3819exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3820@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3821a @samp{/} character.
3822
3823File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3824specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3825does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3826
3827If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3828appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3829will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3830sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3831@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3832@smallexample
3833.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3834.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3835@end smallexample
3836
bcaa7b3e 3837@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3838Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3839in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3840this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3841pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3842@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3843into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3844
bcaa7b3e
L
3845@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3846@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3847difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3848ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3849
3850@cindex SORT
3851@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3852
3853When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3854can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3855
3856@enumerate
3857@item
3858@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3859It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3860sections have the same name.
3861@item
3862@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3863It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3864sections have the same alignment.
3865@item
c0065db7 3866@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
3867treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3868@item
3869@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3870is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3871@item
3872All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3873@end enumerate
3874
3875When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3876section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3877takes precedence over the command line option.
3878
3879If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3880command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3881treated as nested sorting command.
3882
3883@enumerate
3884@item
3885@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3886@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3887@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3888@item
3889@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3890@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3891@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3892@end enumerate
3893
3894If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3895command line option will be ignored.
3896
252b5132
RH
3897If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3898@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3899precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3900
3901This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3902files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3903sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3904The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3905with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3906linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3907@smallexample
3908@group
3909SECTIONS @{
3910 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3911 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3912 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3913 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3914@}
3915@end group
3916@end smallexample
3917
3918@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 3919@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
3920@cindex common symbol placement
3921@cindex uninitialized data placement
3922A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3923file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
3924linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3925named @samp{COMMON}.
3926
3927You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
3928other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
3929particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
3930input files are placed in another section.
3931
3932In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
3933@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
3934@smallexample
3935.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
3936@end smallexample
3937
3938@cindex scommon section
3939@cindex small common symbols
3940Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
3941example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
3942symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
3943different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
3944the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
3945symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
3946to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
3947locations.
3948
3949@cindex [COMMON]
3950You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
3951notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
3952@samp{*(COMMON)}.
3953
3954@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 3955@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
3956@cindex KEEP
3957@cindex garbage collection
3958When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 3959it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
3960This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
3961with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 3962@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
3963
3964@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 3965@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
3966The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
3967to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
3968start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
3969@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
3970follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
3971@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
3972@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
3973All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
3974files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
3975
3976@smallexample
3977@group
3978SECTIONS @{
3979 outputa 0x10000 :
3980 @{
3981 all.o
3982 foo.o (.input1)
3983 @}
36f63dca
NC
3984@end group
3985@group
252b5132
RH
3986 outputb :
3987 @{
3988 foo.o (.input2)
3989 foo1.o (.input1)
3990 @}
36f63dca
NC
3991@end group
3992@group
252b5132
RH
3993 outputc :
3994 @{
3995 *(.input1)
3996 *(.input2)
3997 @}
3998@}
3999@end group
a1ab1d2a 4000@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4001
4002@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4003@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4004@cindex data
4005@cindex section data
4006@cindex output section data
4007@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4008@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4009@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4010@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4011@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4012You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4013@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4014an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4015parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4016value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4017counter.
4018
4019The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4020store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4021bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4022stored.
4023
4024For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4025of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4026@smallexample
4027BYTE(1)
4028LONG(addr)
4029@end smallexample
4030
4031When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4032same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4033target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4034@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4035@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4036
4037If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4038which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4039When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4040true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4041endianness of the first input object file.
4042
36f63dca 4043Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4044between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4045@smallexample
4046SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4047@end smallexample
4048whereas this will work:
4049@smallexample
4050SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4051@end smallexample
4052
252b5132
RH
4053@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4054@cindex holes, filling
4055@cindex unspecified memory
4056You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4057current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4058otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4059gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4060with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4061necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4062point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4063than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4064different parts of an output section.
4065
4066This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4067value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4068@smallexample
563e308f 4069FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4070@end smallexample
4071
4072The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4073section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4074part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4075entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4076precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4077expression.
252b5132
RH
4078
4079@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4080@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4081There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4082commands.
4083
4084@table @code
4085@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4086@cindex input filename symbols
4087@cindex filename symbols
4088@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4089The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4090The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4091file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4092the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4093
4094This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4095normally used for any other object file format.
4096
4097@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4098@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4099@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4100@item CONSTRUCTORS
4101When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4102unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4103destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4104arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4105automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4106For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4107linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4108@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4109ignored for other object file formats.
4110
4111The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4112constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4113Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4114the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4115first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4116of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4117compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4118formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4119@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4120the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4121destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4122@code{exit}.
4123
4124For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4125arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4126addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4127and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4128linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4129runtime code expects to see.
4130
4131@smallexample
4132 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4133 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4134 *(.ctors)
4135 LONG(0)
4136 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4137 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4138 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4139 *(.dtors)
4140 LONG(0)
4141 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4142@end smallexample
4143
4144If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4145which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4146are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4147are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4148command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4149@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4150@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4151@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4152
4153Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4154and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4155need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4156scripts.
4157
4158@end table
4159
4160@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4161@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4162@cindex discarding sections
4163@cindex sections, discarding
4164@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4165The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4166for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4167be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4168@smallexample
49c13adb 4169.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4170@end smallexample
4171@noindent
4172will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4173@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4174sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4175space in an output section will also create the output section.
4176
a0976ea4 4177The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4178on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4179symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4180the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4181section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4182
4183@cindex /DISCARD/
4184The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4185input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4186section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4187
4188@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4189@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4190@cindex output section attributes
4191We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4192like this:
0c71d759 4193
252b5132 4194@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4195@group
7e7d5768 4196@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4197 [AT(@var{lma})]
4198 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4199 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4200 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4201 @{
4202 @var{output-section-command}
4203 @var{output-section-command}
4204 @dots{}
562d3460 4205 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4206@end group
4207@end smallexample
0c71d759 4208
252b5132
RH
4209We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4210@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4211remaining section attributes.
4212
a1ab1d2a 4213@menu
252b5132
RH
4214* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4215* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4216* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4217* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4218* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4219* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4220* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4221* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4222@end menu
4223
4224@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4225@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4226Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4227parentheses. The following types are defined:
4228
4229@table @code
4230@item NOLOAD
4231The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4232loaded into memory when the program is run.
4233@item DSECT
4234@itemx COPY
4235@itemx INFO
4236@itemx OVERLAY
4237These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4238rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4239marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4240section when the program is run.
4241@end table
4242
4243@kindex NOLOAD
4244@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4245@cindex loading, preventing
4246The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4247the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4248the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4249@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4250need to be loaded when the program is run. The contents of the
4251@samp{ROM} section will appear in the linker output file as usual.
4252@smallexample
4253@group
4254SECTIONS @{
4255 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4256 @dots{}
4257@}
4258@end group
4259@end smallexample
4260
4261@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4262@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4263@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4264@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4265@cindex load address
4266@cindex section load address
4267Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4268@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The address expression which may appear in
4269an output section description sets the VMA (@pxref{Output Section
4270Address}).
4271
dc0b6aa0
AM
4272The expression @var{lma} that follows the @code{AT} keyword specifies
4273the load address of the section.
6bdafbeb
NC
4274
4275Alternatively, with @samp{AT>@var{lma_region}} expression, you may
4276specify a memory region for the section's load address. @xref{MEMORY}.
4277Note that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the
4278linker will use the @var{lma_region} as the VMA region as well.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4279
4280If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4281section, the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between
4282VMA and LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output
4283section in the same region. If there is no preceding output section
4284or the section is not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal
4285to the VMA.
6bdafbeb 4286@xref{Output Section Region}.
252b5132
RH
4287
4288@cindex ROM initialized data
4289@cindex initialized data in ROM
4290This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4291example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4292called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4293@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4294even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4295uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4296defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4297counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4298
4299@smallexample
4300@group
4301SECTIONS
4302 @{
4303 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4304 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4305 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4306 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4307 .bss 0x3000 :
4308 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4309@}
4310@end group
4311@end smallexample
4312
4313The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4314this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4315the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4316how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4317script.
4318
4319@smallexample
4320@group
4321extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4322char *src = &_etext;
4323char *dst = &_data;
4324
4325/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4326while (dst < &_edata) @{
4327 *dst++ = *src++;
4328@}
4329
4330/* Zero bss */
4331for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4332 *dst = 0;
4333@end group
4334@end smallexample
4335
bbf115d3
L
4336@node Forced Output Alignment
4337@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4338@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4339@cindex forcing output section alignment
4340@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4341You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4342
7e7d5768
AM
4343@node Forced Input Alignment
4344@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4345@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4346@cindex forcing input section alignment
4347@cindex input section alignment
4348You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4349SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4350sections, whether larger or smaller.
4351
0c71d759
NC
4352@node Output Section Constraint
4353@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4354@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4355@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4356@cindex constraints on output sections
4357You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4358of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4359read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4360@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4361
252b5132 4362@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4363@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4364@kindex >@var{region}
4365@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4366@cindex memory regions and sections
4367You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4368using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4369
4370Here is a simple example:
4371@smallexample
4372@group
4373MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4374SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4375@end group
4376@end smallexample
4377
4378@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4379@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4380@kindex :@var{phdr}
4381@cindex section, assigning to program header
4382@cindex program headers and sections
4383You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4384using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4385one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4386assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4387@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4388linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4389
4390Here is a simple example:
4391@smallexample
4392@group
4393PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4394SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4395@end group
4396@end smallexample
4397
4398@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4399@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4400@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4401@cindex section fill pattern
4402@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4403You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4404@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4405(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4406within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4407alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4408necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4409of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4410an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4411fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4412other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4413pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4414expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4415
4416You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4417output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4418
4419Here is a simple example:
4420@smallexample
4421@group
563e308f 4422SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4423@end group
4424@end smallexample
4425
4426@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4427@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4428@kindex OVERLAY
4429@cindex overlays
4430An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4431are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4432the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4433copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4434required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4435can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4436than another.
4437
4438Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4439@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4440output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4441command is as follows:
4442@smallexample
4443@group
4444OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4445 @{
4446 @var{secname1}
4447 @{
4448 @var{output-section-command}
4449 @var{output-section-command}
4450 @dots{}
4451 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4452 @var{secname2}
4453 @{
4454 @var{output-section-command}
4455 @var{output-section-command}
4456 @dots{}
4457 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4458 @dots{}
4459 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4460@end group
4461@end smallexample
4462
4463Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4464section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4465section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4466those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4467except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4468sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4469
4470The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4471addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4472memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4473whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4474and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4475and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4476
4477If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4478among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4479all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4480section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4481NOCROSSREFS}.
4482
4483For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4484provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4485defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4486@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4487the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4488within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4489symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4490
4491At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4492the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4493
4494Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4495@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4496@smallexample
4497@group
4498 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4499 @{
4500 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4501 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4502 @}
4503@end group
4504@end smallexample
4505@noindent
4506This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4507address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4508@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4509following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4510@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4511@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4512
4513C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4514like the following.
4515
4516@smallexample
4517@group
4518 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4519 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4520 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4521@end group
4522@end smallexample
4523
4524Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4525everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4526example could have been written identically as follows.
4527
4528@smallexample
4529@group
4530 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4531 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4532 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4533 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4534 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4535 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4536 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4537@end group
4538@end smallexample
4539
4540@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4541@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4542@kindex MEMORY
4543@cindex memory regions
4544@cindex regions of memory
4545@cindex allocating memory
4546@cindex discontinuous memory
4547The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4548memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4549
4550The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4551memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4552may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4553can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4554set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4555regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4556around to fit into the available regions.
4557
4558A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4559command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4560you wish. The syntax is:
4561@smallexample
4562@group
a1ab1d2a 4563MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4564 @{
4565 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4566 @dots{}
4567 @}
4568@end group
4569@end smallexample
4570
4571The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4572region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4573Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4574with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4575must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4576add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4577command.
252b5132
RH
4578
4579@cindex memory region attributes
4580The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4581whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4582not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4583@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4584section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4585the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4586them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4587
4588The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4589@table @samp
4590@item R
4591Read-only section
4592@item W
4593Read/write section
4594@item X
4595Executable section
4596@item A
4597Allocatable section
4598@item I
4599Initialized section
4600@item L
4601Same as @samp{I}
4602@item !
4603Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
4604@end table
4605
4606If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4607@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4608attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4609in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4610attributes.
4611
4612@kindex ORIGIN =
4613@kindex o =
4614@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4615The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4616the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4617cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4618abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4619@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4620
4621@kindex LENGTH =
4622@kindex len =
4623@kindex l =
4624The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4625region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4626be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4627@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4628
4629In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4630available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4631and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4632linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4633is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4634or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4635explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4636region.
4637
4638@smallexample
4639@group
a1ab1d2a 4640MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4641 @{
4642 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4643 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4644 @}
4645@end group
4646@end smallexample
4647
4648Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4649specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4650@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4651a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4652output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4653was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4654the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4655output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4656region, the linker will issue an error message.
4657
3ec57632 4658It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4659expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4660@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4661
4662@smallexample
4663@group
c0065db7 4664 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4665@end group
4666@end smallexample
4667
252b5132
RH
4668@node PHDRS
4669@section PHDRS Command
4670@kindex PHDRS
4671@cindex program headers
4672@cindex ELF program headers
4673@cindex program segments
4674@cindex segments, ELF
4675The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4676@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4677loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4678program with the @samp{-p} option.
4679
4680When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4681reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4682program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4683This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4684interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4685
4686The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4687in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4688precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4689the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4690not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4691
4692The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4693generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4694ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4695
4696This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4697@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4698
4699@smallexample
4700@group
4701PHDRS
4702@{
4703 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4704 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4705@}
4706@end group
4707@end smallexample
4708
4709The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4710of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4711header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4712with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
4713must have a distinct name.
4714
4715Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4716system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4717specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4718sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4719attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4720Section Phdr}.
4721
4722It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4723merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4724repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4725contain the section.
4726
4727If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4728then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4729not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4730convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4731placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4732default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4733segment at all.
4734
4735@kindex FILEHDR
4736@kindex PHDRS
4737You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords appear after
4738the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4739The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4740file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
4741include the ELF program headers themselves.
4742
4743The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4744value of the keyword.
4745
4746@table @asis
4747@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4748Indicates an unused program header.
4749
4750@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4751Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4752the file.
4753
4754@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4755Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4756
4757@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4758Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4759found.
4760
4761@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4762Indicates a segment holding note information.
4763
4764@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4765A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4766ABI.
4767
4768@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4769Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4770
4771@item @var{expression}
4772An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4773be used for types not defined above.
4774@end table
4775
4776You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4777in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4778@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4779Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4780output section attribute.
4781
4782The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4783which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4784explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4785an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4786header.
4787
4788Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4789headers used on a native ELF system.
4790
4791@example
4792@group
4793PHDRS
4794@{
4795 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4796 interp PT_INTERP ;
4797 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4798 data PT_LOAD ;
4799 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4800@}
4801
4802SECTIONS
4803@{
4804 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4805 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4806 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4807 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4808 @dots{}
4809 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4810 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4811 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4812 @dots{}
4813@}
4814@end group
4815@end example
4816
4817@node VERSION
4818@section VERSION Command
4819@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4820@cindex symbol versions
4821@cindex version script
4822@cindex versions of symbols
4823The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4824only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4825symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4826a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4827shared library.
4828
4829You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4830you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4831also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4832
4833The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4834@smallexample
4835VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4836@end smallexample
4837
4838The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4839Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4840version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4841version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4842version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4843scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4844library.
4845
4846The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4847examples.
4848
4849@smallexample
4850VERS_1.1 @{
4851 global:
4852 foo1;
4853 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
4854 old*;
4855 original*;
4856 new*;
252b5132
RH
4857@};
4858
4859VERS_1.2 @{
4860 foo2;
4861@} VERS_1.1;
4862
4863VERS_2.0 @{
4864 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 4865 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb
MM
4866 ns::*;
4867 "int f(int, double)";
c0065db7 4868 @}
252b5132
RH
4869@} VERS_1.2;
4870@end smallexample
4871
4872This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4873version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4874The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4875a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
4876of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4877symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4878is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4879in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
4880However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4881name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
4882
4883Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4884depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4885to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4886
4887Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4888depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4889and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4890
4891When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4892specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4893unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 4894unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
4895somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
4896wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
4897wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
4898set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
4899ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
4900
4901The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4902they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
4903could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
4904However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4905
0f6bf451 4906Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
4907in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4908symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
4909won't.
4910
4911@smallexample
7c9c73be 4912@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 4913@end smallexample
6b9b879a 4914
252b5132
RH
4915When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
4916symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
4917requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
4918shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
4919loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
4920linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
4921application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
4922way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
4923all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
4924search for each symbol reference.
4925
4926The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
4927doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
4928that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
4929functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
4930the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
4931required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
4932that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
4933versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
4934the libraries being used with the application are too old.
4935
4936There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
4937first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
4938source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
4939script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
4940maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
4941@smallexample
4942__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4943@end smallexample
4944@noindent
4945in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
4946be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
4947The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
4948@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
4949takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
4950
4951The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
4952function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
4953an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
4954version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
4955linked against the old interface to continue to function.
4956
4957To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
4958source file. Here is an example:
4959
4960@smallexample
4961__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
4962__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4963__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
4964__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
4965@end smallexample
4966
4967In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
4968unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
4969example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
4970@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
4971
4972When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
4973some way to specify a default version to which external references to
4974this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
4975@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
4976declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
4977you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
4978
4979If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
4980within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 4981(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
4982specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
4983
cb840a31
L
4984You can also specify the language in the version script:
4985
4986@smallexample
4987VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
4988@end smallexample
4989
c0065db7 4990The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
4991The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
4992demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
4993patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}.
4994
86043bbb
MM
4995Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
4996described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
4997or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
4998the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
4999whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5000cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5001might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5002should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5003expect when you upgrade.
5004
252b5132
RH
5005@node Expressions
5006@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5007@cindex expressions
5008@cindex arithmetic
5009The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5010that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5011expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5012host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5013
5014You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5015
5016The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5017expressions.
5018
5019@menu
5020* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5021* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5022* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5023* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5024* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5025* Operators:: Operators
5026* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5027* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5028* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5029@end menu
5030
5031@node Constants
5032@subsection Constants
5033@cindex integer notation
5034@cindex constants in linker scripts
5035All constants are integers.
5036
5037As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5038octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8
NC
5039hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5040@samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5041@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5042value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5043
5044@cindex scaled integers
5045@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5046@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5047@cindex suffixes for integers
5048@cindex integer suffixes
5049In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5050constant by
5051@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5052@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5053@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5054@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5055@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5056@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5057@tex
5058${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5059@end tex
5060@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5061respectively. For example, the following
5062all refer to the same quantity:
5063
252b5132 5064@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5065_fourk_1 = 4K;
5066_fourk_2 = 4096;
5067_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5068_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5069@end smallexample
5070
8a308ae8
NC
5071Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5072conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5073
0c71d759
NC
5074@node Symbolic Constants
5075@subsection Symbolic Constants
5076@cindex symbolic constants
5077@kindex CONSTANT
5078It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5079the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5080
5081@table @code
5082@item MAXPAGESIZE
5083@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5084The target's maximum page size.
5085
5086@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5087@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5088The target's default page size.
5089@end table
5090
5091So for example:
5092
5093@smallexample
5094 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5095@end smallexample
5096
5097will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5098supported by the target.
5099
252b5132
RH
5100@node Symbols
5101@subsection Symbol Names
5102@cindex symbol names
5103@cindex names
5104@cindex quoted symbol names
5105@kindex "
5106Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5107and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5108Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5109specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5110keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5111@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5112"SECTION" = 9;
5113"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5114@end smallexample
5115
5116Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5117to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5118whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5119
ecca9871
L
5120@node Orphan Sections
5121@subsection Orphan Sections
5122@cindex orphan
5123Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5124are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5125script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5126output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5127placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5128attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5129same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5130If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5131at the end of the file.
5132
5133For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5134well as section flag.
5135
41911f68 5136If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5137the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
41911f68
NC
5138__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5139section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5140orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5141representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5142character.
5143
252b5132
RH
5144@node Location Counter
5145@subsection The Location Counter
5146@kindex .
5147@cindex dot
5148@cindex location counter
5149@cindex current output location
5150The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5151current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5152location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5153within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5154anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5155
5156@cindex holes
5157Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5158moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5159location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5160and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5161doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5162
5163@smallexample
5164SECTIONS
5165@{
5166 output :
5167 @{
5168 file1(.text)
5169 . = . + 1000;
5170 file2(.text)
5171 . += 1000;
5172 file3(.text)
563e308f 5173 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5174@}
5175@end smallexample
5176@noindent
5177In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5178located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5179followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5180@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5181@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5182specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5183
5c6bbab8
NC
5184@cindex dot inside sections
5185Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5186current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5187statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5188absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5189however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5190not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5191
5192@smallexample
5193SECTIONS
5194@{
5195 . = 0x100
5196 .text: @{
5197 *(.text)
5198 . = 0x200
5199 @}
5200 . = 0x500
5201 .data: @{
5202 *(.data)
5203 . += 0x600
5204 @}
5205@}
5206@end smallexample
5207
5208The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5209and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5210the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5211much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5212move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5213and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5214the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5215the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5216
b5666f2f
AM
5217@cindex dot outside sections
5218Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5219output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5220needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5221
5222@smallexample
5223SECTIONS
5224@{
5225 start_of_text = . ;
5226 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5227 end_of_text = . ;
5228
5229 start_of_data = . ;
5230 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5231 end_of_data = . ;
5232@}
5233@end smallexample
5234
5235If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5236not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5237between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5238should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5239blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5240the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5241sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5242statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5243special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5244place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5245as follows:
5246
5247@smallexample
5248SECTIONS
5249@{
5250 start_of_text = . ;
5251 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5252 end_of_text = . ;
5253
5254 start_of_data = . ;
5255 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5256 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5257 end_of_data = . ;
5258@}
5259@end smallexample
5260
5261This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5262@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5263placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5264assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5265a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5266section. So you could write:
5267
5268@smallexample
5269SECTIONS
5270@{
5271 start_of_text = . ;
5272 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5273 end_of_text = . ;
5274
5275 . = . ;
5276 start_of_data = . ;
5277 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5278 end_of_data = . ;
5279@}
5280@end smallexample
5281
5282Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5283@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5284
252b5132
RH
5285@need 2000
5286@node Operators
5287@subsection Operators
5288@cindex operators for arithmetic
5289@cindex arithmetic operators
5290@cindex precedence in expressions
5291The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5292the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5293@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5294@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5295@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5296@smallexample
5297precedence associativity Operators Notes
5298(highest)
52991 left ! - ~ (1)
53002 left * / %
53013 left + -
53024 left >> <<
53035 left == != > < <= >=
53046 left &
53057 left |
53068 left &&
53079 left ||
530810 right ? :
530911 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5310(lowest)
5311@end smallexample
5312Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5313(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5314(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5315@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5316@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5317@tex
5318\vskip \baselineskip
5319%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5320\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5321\hrule
5322\halign
5323{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5324height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5325&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5326height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5327\noalign{\hrule}
5328height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5329&highest&&&&&\cr
5330% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5331&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5332&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5333&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5334&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5335&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5336&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5337&7&&left&&|&\cr
5338&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5339&9&&left&&||&\cr
5340&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5341&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5342&lowest&&&&&\cr
5343height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5344\hrule}
5345@end tex
5346@iftex
5347{
5348@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5349@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5350@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5351}
5352@end iftex
5353@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5354
5355@node Evaluation
5356@subsection Evaluation
5357@cindex lazy evaluation
5358@cindex expression evaluation order
5359The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5360an expression when absolutely necessary.
5361
5362The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5363address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5364regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5365as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5366
5367However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5368until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5369other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5370for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5371
5372The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5373assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5374allocation.
5375
5376Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5377@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5378
5379If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5380available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5381following
5382@smallexample
5383@group
5384SECTIONS
5385 @{
a1ab1d2a 5386 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5387 @{ *(.text) @}
5388 @}
5389@end group
5390@end smallexample
5391@noindent
5392will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5393address}.
5394
5395@node Expression Section
5396@subsection The Section of an Expression
5397@cindex expression sections
5398@cindex absolute expressions
5399@cindex relative expressions
5400@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5401@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5402@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5403When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
5404or relative to some section. A relative expression is expressed as a
5405fixed offset from the base of a section.
5406
5407The position of the expression within the linker script determines
5408whether it is absolute or relative. An expression which appears within
5409an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
5410section. An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
5411
5412A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you request
5413relocatable output using the @samp{-r} option. That means that a
5414further link operation may change the value of the symbol. The symbol's
5415section will be the section of the relative expression.
5416
5417A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
5418through any further link operation. The symbol will be absolute, and
5419will not have any particular associated section.
5420
5421You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5422to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5423create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5424section @samp{.data}:
5425@smallexample
5426SECTIONS
5427 @{
5428 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5429 @}
5430@end smallexample
5431@noindent
5432If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5433@samp{.data} section.
5434
5435@node Builtin Functions
5436@subsection Builtin Functions
5437@cindex functions in expressions
5438The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5439use in linker script expressions.
5440
5441@table @code
5442@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5443@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5444@cindex expression, absolute
5445Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5446of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5447value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5448normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5449
5450@item ADDR(@var{section})
5451@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5452@cindex section address in expression
5453Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5454script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5455the following example, @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned
5456identical values:
5457@smallexample
5458@group
5459SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5460 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5461 @{
252b5132
RH
5462 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5463 @dots{}
5464 @}
5465 .output :
5466 @{
5467 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5468 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5469 @}
5470@dots{} @}
5471@end group
5472@end smallexample
5473
876f4090
NS
5474@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5475@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5476@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5477@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5478@cindex round up location counter
5479@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5480@cindex round up expression
5481@cindex align expression
5482Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5483to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5484doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5485arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5486expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5487equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5488
5489Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5490next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5491variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5492input sections:
252b5132
RH
5493@smallexample
5494@group
5495SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5496 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5497 *(.data)
5498 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5499 @}
5500@dots{} @}
5501@end group
5502@end smallexample
5503@noindent
5504The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5505a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5506a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5507of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5508
5509The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5510
362c1d1a
NS
5511@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5512@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5513@cindex section alignment
5514Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5515been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5516evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5517the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5518value in that section.
5519@smallexample
5520@group
5521SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5522 .output @{
5523 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5524 @dots{}
5525 @}
5526@dots{} @}
5527@end group
5528@end smallexample
5529
252b5132
RH
5530@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5531@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5532This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5533scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5534section.
5535
2d20f7bf
JJ
5536@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5537@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5538This is equivalent to either
5539@smallexample
5540(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5541@end smallexample
5542or
5543@smallexample
5544(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5545@end smallexample
5546@noindent
5547depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5548for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5549@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5550If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5551memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5552bytes in the on-disk file.
5553
5554This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5555any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5556@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5557be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5558working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5559
5560@noindent
5561Example:
5562@smallexample
5563 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5564@end smallexample
5565
5566@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5567@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5568This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5569evaluation purposes.
5570
5571@smallexample
5572 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5573@end smallexample
5574
a4f5ad88
JJ
5575@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5576@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5577This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5578@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5579When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5580does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5581@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5582boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5583it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5584@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5585
5586@smallexample
5587 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5588@end smallexample
5589
252b5132
RH
5590@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5591@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5592@cindex symbol defaults
5593Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5594defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5595return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5596default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5597shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5598the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5599existed, its value is preserved:
5600
5601@smallexample
5602@group
5603SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5604 .text : @{
5605 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5606 @dots{}
5607 @}
5608 @dots{}
5609@}
5610@end group
5611@end smallexample
5612
3ec57632
NC
5613@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5614@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5615Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5616
252b5132
RH
5617@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5618@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5619@cindex section load address in expression
5620Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. This is normally
5621the same as @code{ADDR}, but it may be different if the @code{AT}
5622attribute is used in the output section definition (@pxref{Output
5623Section LMA}).
5624
5625@kindex MAX
5626@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5627Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5628
5629@kindex MIN
5630@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5631Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5632
5633@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5634@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5635@cindex unallocated address, next
5636Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5637This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5638use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5639output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5640
3ec57632
NC
5641@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5642@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5643Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5644
ba916c8a
MM
5645@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5646@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5647Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5648value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5649option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5650@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5651be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5652``bss'' sections, but you use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5653name.
5654
252b5132
RH
5655@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5656@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5657@cindex section size
5658Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5659been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5660evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5661@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5662@smallexample
5663@group
5664SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5665 .output @{
5666 .start = . ;
5667 @dots{}
5668 .end = . ;
5669 @}
5670 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5671 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5672@dots{} @}
5673@end group
5674@end smallexample
5675
5676@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5677@itemx sizeof_headers
5678@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5679@cindex header size
5680Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5681information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5682this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5683choose, to facilitate paging.
5684
5685@cindex not enough room for program headers
5686@cindex program headers, not enough room
5687When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5688@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5689number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5690addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5691additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5692room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5693the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5694script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5695you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5696command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5697@end table
5698
5699@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5700@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5701@cindex implicit linker scripts
5702If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5703an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5704linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5705linker will report an error.
5706
5707An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5708
5709Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5710assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5711commands.
5712
5713Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5714at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5715read. This can affect archive searching.
5716
5717@ifset GENERIC
5718@node Machine Dependent
5719@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5720
5721@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5722@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5723sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5724functionality are not listed.
5725
5726@menu
36f63dca
NC
5727@ifset H8300
5728* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5729@end ifset
5730@ifset I960
5731* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5732@end ifset
5733@ifset ARM
5734* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5735@end ifset
5736@ifset HPPA
5737* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5738@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5739@ifset M68K
5740* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5741@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5742@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5743* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5744@end ifset
2469cfa2 5745@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5746* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5747@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5748@ifset M68HC11
5749* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5750@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5751@ifset POWERPC
5752* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5753@end ifset
5754@ifset POWERPC64
5755* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5756@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5757@ifset SPU
5758* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5759@end ifset
74459f0e 5760@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5761* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5762@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5763@ifset WIN32
5764* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5765@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5766@ifset XTENSA
5767* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5768@end ifset
252b5132
RH
5769@end menu
5770@end ifset
5771
252b5132
RH
5772@ifset H8300
5773@ifclear GENERIC
5774@raisesections
5775@end ifclear
5776
5777@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 5778@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
5779
5780@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 5781For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
5782you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5783
5784@table @emph
5785@cindex relaxing on H8/300
5786@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 5787@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
5788targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5789program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5790respectively.
5791
5792@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5793@item synthesizing instructions
5794@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 5795@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
5796sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5797page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5798(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5799@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5800top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
5801
5802@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 5803@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 5804biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 5805which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
5806page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5807(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 5808@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
5809the top page of memory).
5810
5811@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
5812@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
581332 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
5814changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5815(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 5816@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 5817the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
5818@end table
5819
5820@ifclear GENERIC
5821@lowersections
5822@end ifclear
5823@end ifset
5824
36f63dca 5825@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 5826@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 5827@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
5828@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5829@node Renesas
5830@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 5831
c2dcd04e
NC
5832@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5833H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5834options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
5835@end ifset
5836@end ifclear
5837
5838@ifset I960
5839@ifclear GENERIC
5840@raisesections
5841@end ifclear
5842
5843@node i960
5844@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
5845
5846@cindex i960 support
5847
5848You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
5849specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
5850family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
5851incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
5852linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
5853libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
5854search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
5855
5856For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
5857well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
5858paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
5859the names
5860
5861@smallexample
5862@group
5863try
5864libtry.a
5865tryca
5866libtryca.a
5867@end group
5868@end smallexample
5869
5870@noindent
5871The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
5872two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
5873
5874You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
5875the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
5876use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
5877specifies a library.
5878
5879@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
5880@cindex relaxing on i960
5881@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
5882you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
5883@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
5884them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
5885instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
5886instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
5887target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
5888not itself call any subroutines).
5889
48229727
JB
5890@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
5891@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
5892@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
5893The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
5894
5895The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
5896
36f63dca
NC
5897@ifclear GENERIC
5898@lowersections
5899@end ifclear
5900@end ifset
5901
5902@ifset ARM
5903@ifclear GENERIC
5904@raisesections
5905@end ifclear
5906
93fd0973
SC
5907@ifset M68HC11
5908@ifclear GENERIC
5909@raisesections
5910@end ifclear
5911
5912@node M68HC11/68HC12
5913@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5914
5915@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
5916
5917@subsection Linker Relaxation
5918
5919For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
5920optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5921
5922@table @emph
5923@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
5924@item relaxing address modes
5925@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5926targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5927program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5928respectively.
5929
5930@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
5931transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
5932page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
5933
5934@item relaxing gcc instruction group
5935When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
5936of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
5937addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
5938@code{bset} instructions.
5939
5940@end table
5941
5942@subsection Trampoline Generation
5943
5944@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
5945@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
5946For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
5947call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 5948will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
5949trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
5950case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
5951point to the function trampoline.
5952
5953@ifclear GENERIC
5954@lowersections
5955@end ifclear
5956@end ifset
5957
36f63dca 5958@node ARM
3674e28a 5959@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
5960
5961@cindex ARM interworking support
5962@kindex --support-old-code
5963For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 5964between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
5965been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
5966line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
5967libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
5968option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
5969given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
5970which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
5971the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
5972non-interworking aware Thumb code.
5973
5974@cindex thumb entry point
5975@cindex entry point, thumb
5976@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
5977The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
5978@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
5979But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
5980branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
5981executing in Thumb mode straight away.
5982
ce11ba6c
KT
5983@cindex PE import table prefixing
5984@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
5985The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
5986the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
5987elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
5988import tables. By default this option is turned off.
5989
e489d0ae
PB
5990@cindex BE8
5991@kindex --be8
5992The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
5993executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
5994The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
5995
3674e28a
PB
5996@cindex TARGET1
5997@kindex --target1-rel
5998@kindex --target1-abs
5999The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6000@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6001or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6002and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6003
6004@cindex TARGET2
6005@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6006The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6007@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6008meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6009@table @samp
6010@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6011@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6012@item abs
6013@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6014@item got-rel
6015@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6016@end table
6017
319850b4
JB
6018@cindex FIX_V4BX
6019@kindex --fix-v4bx
6020The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6021specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6022interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6023also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6024
6025In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6026linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6027@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6028
6029In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6030relocations are ignored.
6031
845b51d6
PB
6032@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6033@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6034Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6035relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6036
6037@smallexample
6038TST rM, #1
6039MOVEQ PC, rM
6040BX Rn
6041@end smallexample
6042
6043This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6044and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6045condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
6046
33bfe774
JB
6047@cindex USE_BLX
6048@kindex --use-blx
6049The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6050BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6051situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6052code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6053each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6054
6055This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6056specify it if you are using that target.
6057
c6dd86c6
JB
6058@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6059@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6060The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6061bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6062instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6063to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6064the support code can read the intended values.
6065
6066The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6067intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6068and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6069intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6070full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6071you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6072
6073If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6074enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6075@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6076mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6077vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6078@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6079
6080If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6081potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6082such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6083first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6084instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6085the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6086are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6087
bf21ed78
MS
6088@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6089@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6090The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6091warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6092enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6093linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6094using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6095not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6096
6097@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6098@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6099The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6100warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6101@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6102linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6103using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6104
726150b7
NC
6105@cindex PIC_VENEER
6106@kindex --pic-veneer
6107The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6108ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6109is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6110@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6111
6112@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6113@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6114The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6115code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6116perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6117placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6118controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6119The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6120duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6121group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6122code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6123where they should be placed.
6124
6125The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6126@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6127placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6128branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6129placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6130value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6131exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6132A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6133linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6134from the input sections.
6135
6136The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6137@samp{N = +1}.
6138
1a51c1a4
NC
6139Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6140only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6141otherwise.
6142
36f63dca
NC
6143@ifclear GENERIC
6144@lowersections
6145@end ifclear
6146@end ifset
6147
6148@ifset HPPA
6149@ifclear GENERIC
6150@raisesections
6151@end ifclear
6152
6153@node HPPA ELF32
6154@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6155@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6156@kindex --multi-subspace
6157When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6158import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6159The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6160stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6161multiple sub-spaces.
6162
6163@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6164@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6165Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6166stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6167@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6168sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6169a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6170the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6171conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6172prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6173A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6174branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6175@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6176@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6177detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6178positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6179
6180Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6181single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6182create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6183large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6184
6185@ifclear GENERIC
6186@lowersections
6187@end ifclear
6188@end ifset
6189
7fb9f789
NC
6190@ifset M68K
6191@ifclear GENERIC
6192@raisesections
6193@end ifclear
6194
6195@node M68K
6196@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6197
6198@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6199@kindex --got=@var{type}
6200The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6201The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6202@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6203the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6204@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6205entries only at non-negative offsets.
6206@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6207entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6208support such GOTs.
6209@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6210output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6211file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6212files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6213
6214@ifclear GENERIC
6215@lowersections
6216@end ifclear
6217@end ifset
6218
36f63dca
NC
6219@ifset MMIX
6220@ifclear GENERIC
6221@raisesections
6222@end ifclear
6223
6224@node MMIX
6225@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6226For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6227@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6228understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6229can translate between the two formats.
6230
6231There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6232Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6233registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6234equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6235@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6236global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6237this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6238symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6239
7a2de473
HPN
6240Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6241@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6242The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6243of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6244
6245Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6246are left out from an mmo file.
6247
6248@ifclear GENERIC
6249@lowersections
6250@end ifclear
6251@end ifset
6252
6253@ifset MSP430
6254@ifclear GENERIC
6255@raisesections
6256@end ifclear
6257
6258@node MSP430
6259@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6260For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6261will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6262just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6263
6264@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6265The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6266
6267@table @code
6268@item @samp{.vectors}
6269Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6270
6271@item @samp{.bootloader}
6272Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6273in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6274
6275@item @samp{.infomem}
6276Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6277this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6278
c0065db7 6279@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6280This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6281in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6282
6283@item @samp{.noinit}
6284Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6285
c0065db7 6286The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6287@end table
6288
6289@ifclear GENERIC
6290@lowersections
6291@end ifclear
6292@end ifset
6293
2a60a7a8
AM
6294@ifset POWERPC
6295@ifclear GENERIC
6296@raisesections
6297@end ifclear
6298
6299@node PowerPC ELF32
6300@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6301@cindex PowerPC long branches
6302@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6303Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6304displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6305@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6306@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6307the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6308section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6309section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6310@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6311both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6312considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6313
6314@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6315@table @option
6316@cindex PowerPC PLT
6317@kindex --bss-plt
6318@item --bss-plt
6319Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6320generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6321the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6322writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6323@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6324PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6325compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6326BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6327
016687f8
AM
6328@kindex --secure-plt
6329@item --secure-plt
6330@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6331@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6332when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6333layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6334style BSS PLT.
6335
2a60a7a8
AM
6336@cindex PowerPC GOT
6337@kindex --sdata-got
6338@item --sdata-got
6339The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6340sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6341@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6342section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6343@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6344@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6345@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6346@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6347PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6348pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6349GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6350really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6351
6352@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6353@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6354@item --emit-stub-syms
6355This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6356symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6357
6358@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6359@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6360@item --no-tls-optimize
6361PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6362sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6363disable the optimization.
6364@end table
6365
6366@ifclear GENERIC
6367@lowersections
6368@end ifclear
6369@end ifset
6370
6371@ifset POWERPC64
6372@ifclear GENERIC
6373@raisesections
6374@end ifclear
6375
6376@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6377@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6378
6379@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6380@table @option
6381@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6382@kindex --stub-group-size
6383@item --stub-group-size
6384Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6385by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6386@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6387sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6388a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6389the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6390conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6391prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6392A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6393branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6394@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6395@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6396detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6397positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6398
6399Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6400single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6401create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6402large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6403
6404@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6405@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6406@item --emit-stub-syms
6407This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6408symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6409
6410@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6411@kindex --dotsyms
6412@kindex --no-dotsyms
6413@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6414These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6415in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6416function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6417code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6418properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6419to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6420@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6421dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6422feature.
6423
6424@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6425@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6426@item --no-tls-optimize
6427PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6428sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6429disable the optimization.
6430
6431@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6432@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6433@item --no-opd-optimize
6434PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6435corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6436the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6437Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6438
6439@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6440@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6441@item --non-overlapping-opd
6442Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6443@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6444the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6445entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6446
6447@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6448@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6449@item --no-toc-optimize
6450PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6451entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6452reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6453marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6454marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6455relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6456unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6457reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6458discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6459reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6460code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6461optimization.
6462
6463@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6464@kindex --no-multi-toc
6465@item --no-multi-toc
6466By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6467entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6468total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6469grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6470TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6471calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6472help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
647364K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6474Use this option to turn off this feature.
6475@end table
6476
6477@ifclear GENERIC
6478@lowersections
6479@end ifclear
6480@end ifset
6481
49fa1e15
AM
6482@ifset SPU
6483@ifclear GENERIC
6484@raisesections
6485@end ifclear
6486
6487@node SPU ELF
6488@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6489
6490@cindex SPU ELF options
6491@table @option
6492
6493@cindex SPU plugins
6494@kindex --plugin
6495@item --plugin
6496This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6497
6498@cindex SPU overlays
6499@kindex --no-overlays
6500@item --no-overlays
6501Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6502regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6503@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6504turns off all this special overlay handling.
6505
6506@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6507@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6508@item --emit-stub-syms
6509This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6510symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6511
6512@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6513@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6514@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6515This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6516function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6517on calls to non-overlay regions.
6518
6519@cindex SPU local store size
6520@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6521@item --local-store=lo:hi
6522@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6523the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6524range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6525
c0065db7 6526@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6527@kindex --stack-analysis
6528@item --stack-analysis
6529SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6530unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6531under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6532@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6533@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6534determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6535for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6536for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6537for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6538find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6539and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6540under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6541dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6542is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6543and calls will be given.
6544
c0065db7 6545@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6546@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6547@item --emit-stack-syms
6548This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6549in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6550These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6551functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6552functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6553such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6554The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6555@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6556@end table
6557
6558@ifclear GENERIC
6559@lowersections
6560@end ifclear
6561@end ifset
6562
36f63dca
NC
6563@ifset TICOFF
6564@ifclear GENERIC
6565@raisesections
6566@end ifclear
6567
6568@node TI COFF
6569@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6570@cindex TI COFF versions
6571@kindex --format=@var{version}
6572The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6573TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6574also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6575format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6576header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6577
6578@ifclear GENERIC
6579@lowersections
6580@end ifclear
6581@end ifset
6582
2ca22b03
NC
6583@ifset WIN32
6584@ifclear GENERIC
6585@raisesections
6586@end ifclear
6587
6588@node WIN32
6589@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6590
c0065db7 6591This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6592See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6593command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6594
6595@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6596@cindex import libraries
6597@item import libraries
69da35b5 6598The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6599libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6600regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6601archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6602support for creating such libraries provided with the
6603@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6604
c0065db7
RM
6605@item exporting DLL symbols
6606@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6607The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6608
6609@table @emph
6610@item using auto-export functionality
6611@cindex using auto-export functionality
6612By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6613which is controlled by the following command line options:
6614
0a5d968e
NC
6615@itemize
6616@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6617@item --exclude-symbols
6618@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6619@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 6620@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
6621@end itemize
6622
09e2aba4
DK
6623When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6624(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6625symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6626often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6627private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
6628options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
6629exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6630final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6631
6632If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6633command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6634if either of the following are true:
6635
6636@itemize
6637@item A DEF file is used.
6638@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6639@end itemize
dc8465bf 6640
c0065db7
RM
6641@item using a DEF file
6642@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6643Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6644an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6645exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6646name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6647command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6648
6649@example
6650gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6651@end example
6652
0a5d968e
NC
6653Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6654@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6655
dc8465bf
NC
6656Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6657
6658@example
4b5bd4e7 6659LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6660
6661EXPORTS
6662foo
6663bar
6664_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6665another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6666var1 DATA
c0065db7 6667@end example
dc8465bf 6668
4b5bd4e7
DS
6669This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and five
6670symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6671alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6672by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6673@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
6674@code{var1} is declared to be a data object.
6675
6b31ad16
DS
6676The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6677name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6678the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6679
b45619c0
NC
6680When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6681library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6682@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6683executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6684
6685With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6686specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6687non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6688
6689If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6690or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6691filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6692
4b5bd4e7
DS
6693The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6694
6695@example
6696EXPORTS
6697 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6698 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
6699 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] ) *
c0065db7 6700@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6701
6702Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6703@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6704@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6705@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6706Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
6707@samp{<integer>} alias.
6708
6709The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6710
6711@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6712will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6713by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6714linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6715library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6716
6717@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6718The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6719the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6720@code{*_imp__foo}).
6721
6722@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6723well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6724read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6725variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6726the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6727extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6728application will behave unexpectedly.
6729
6730@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6731it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6732symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6733API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6734the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6735
4b5bd4e7
DS
6736See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6737other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6738
6739@cindex creating a DEF file
6740While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6741with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6742
6743@item Using decorations
6744@cindex Using decorations
6745Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6746itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6747declared as:
6748
6749@example
6750__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6751__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6752@end example
6753
6754All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6755any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6756this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6757the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6758
6759Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 6760decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
6761instead:
6762
6763@example
6764__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6765__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6766@end example
6767
c0065db7
RM
6768This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6769when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
6770variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6771code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 6772of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
6773omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6774@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 6775information.
c0065db7 6776@end table
dc8465bf 6777
2ca22b03
NC
6778@cindex automatic data imports
6779@item automatic data imports
6780The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 6781by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 6782compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 6783issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 6784code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 6785c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 6786initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 6787decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 6788platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
6789command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6790The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6791suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6792trigger the feature's use.
6793
c0065db7 6794auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
6795additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6796
c0065db7 6797"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
6798documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6799
c0065db7
RM
6800The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6801occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6802One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
6803below.
6804
6805@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
6806For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6807object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6808offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6809field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6810in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 6811without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 6812The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
6813references.
6814
c0065db7
RM
6815The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6816be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6817themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6818runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6819compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6820support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
6821run without error on an older system.
6822
c0065db7
RM
6823@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6824enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
6825
6826@cindex direct linking to a dll
6827@item direct linking to a dll
6828The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6829including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 6830libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 6831traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
6832libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
6833function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
6834though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 6835storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 6836tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
6837large or complex libraries when using import libs.
6838
c0065db7 6839Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 6840@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 6841of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
6842perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
6843select the dll instead of an import library.
6844
2ca22b03 6845
69da35b5
NC
6846For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
6847to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
6848
6849@example
45e948fe
NC
6850libxxx.dll.a
6851xxx.dll.a
6852libxxx.a
6853xxx.lib
69da35b5 6854cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
6855libxxx.dll
6856xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
6857@end example
6858
69da35b5
NC
6859before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
6860
c0065db7
RM
6861(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
6862where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
6863@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
6864file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
6865@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
6866
c0065db7
RM
6867Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
6868@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
6869was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
6870various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
6871could coexist on the same machine.
6872
2ca22b03
NC
6873The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
6874applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 6875libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
6876
6877@example
6878bin/
6879 cygxxx.dll
6880lib/
6881 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 6882 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
6883@end example
6884
c0065db7
RM
6885Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
6886done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
6887
68881. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
6889@example
6890gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6891@end example
2ca22b03 6892
69da35b5
NC
6893However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
6894(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
6895@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
6896not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
6897
2ca22b03
NC
68982. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
6899directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
6900should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
6901making the app/dll.
6902
6903@example
6904ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 6905@end example
2ca22b03
NC
6906
6907Then you can link without any make environment changes.
6908
6909@example
6910gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6911@end example
69da35b5
NC
6912
6913This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
6914perfectly legal
6915
6916@example
6917bin/
6918 cygxxx-5.dll
6919lib/
c0065db7 6920 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
6921@end example
6922
dc8465bf 6923Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
6924even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
6925@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
6926
6927Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 6928wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
6929
69301. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
6931work with auto-imported data.
6932
dc8465bf
NC
69332. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
6934import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
6935symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
6936for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
6937possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 6938
45e948fe
NC
69393. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
6940critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
6941in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
6942stdcall-decorated assembly names.
6943
69da35b5 6944So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
6945true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
6946a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
6947binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
6948massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
6949requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
6950will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 6951
c0065db7 6952@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 6953@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6954@item adding additional names
6955Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
6956A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
6957exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
6958when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 6959import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 6960
c0065db7 6961@example
dc8465bf
NC
6962LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6963
6964EXPORTS
c0065db7 6965foo
dc8465bf 6966_foo = foo
c0065db7 6967@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6968
6969The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
6970
6971Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
6972source code using the "weak" attribute:
6973
c0065db7
RM
6974@example
6975void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 6976void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 6977@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6978
6979See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
6980symbols.
6981
6982@item renaming symbols
6983Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 6984kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
6985@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
6986DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 6987created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 6988
c0065db7 6989@example
dc8465bf
NC
6990LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6991
6992EXPORTS
6993_foo = foo
c0065db7 6994@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6995
6996The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
6997@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 6998@end table
dc8465bf 6999
0a5d968e 7000Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7001unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7002If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7003@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7004that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7005@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7006renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7007to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7008the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7009In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7010which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7011
7012@cindex weak externals
7013@item weak externals
7014The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7015weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7016defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7017are three variants of weak externals:
7018@itemize
7019@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7020called lazy externals.
7021@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7022This form is not presently implemented.
7023@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7024implemented.
7025@end itemize
7026As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7027are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7028uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7029
7030@cindex aligned common symbols
7031@item aligned common symbols
7032As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7033desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7034the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7035carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7036by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7037tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7038but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7039warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7040@end table
7041
7042@ifclear GENERIC
7043@lowersections
7044@end ifclear
7045@end ifset
7046
e0001a05
NC
7047@ifset XTENSA
7048@ifclear GENERIC
7049@raisesections
7050@end ifclear
7051
7052@node Xtensa
7053@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7054
7055@cindex Xtensa processors
7056The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7057@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7058specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7059keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7060example, with the command:
7061
7062@smallexample
7063SECTIONS
7064@{
7065 .text : @{
7066 *(.literal .text)
7067 @}
7068@}
7069@end smallexample
7070
7071@noindent
7072@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7073and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7074literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7075interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7076group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7077files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7078and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7079
43cd72b9 7080@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7081@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7082Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7083provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7084is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7085literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7086will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7087location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7088the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7089unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7090@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7091range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7092
7093For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7094to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7095instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7096instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7097instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7098@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7099hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7100By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7101switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7102density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7103instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7104performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7105linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7106a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7107
7108The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7109control the linker:
7110
7111@cindex Xtensa options
7112@table @option
e0001a05 7113@kindex --no-relax
43cd72b9
BW
7114@item --no-relax
7115Since the Xtensa version of @code{ld} enables the @option{--relax} option
7116by default, the @option{--no-relax} option is provided to disable
7117relaxation.
7118
7119@item --size-opt
7120When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7121more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7122no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7123alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7124preserve the correctness of the code.
7125@end table
e0001a05
NC
7126
7127@ifclear GENERIC
7128@lowersections
7129@end ifclear
7130@end ifset
7131
252b5132
RH
7132@ifclear SingleFormat
7133@node BFD
7134@chapter BFD
7135
7136@cindex back end
7137@cindex object file management
7138@cindex object formats available
7139@kindex objdump -i
7140The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7141These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7142object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7143format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7144it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7145associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7146object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7147(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7148list all the formats available for your configuration.
7149
7150@cindex BFD requirements
7151@cindex requirements for BFD
7152As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7153several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7154BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7155formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7156been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7157BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7158may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7159
7160One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7161mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7162useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7163conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7164
7165@menu
7166* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7167@end menu
7168
7169@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7170@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7171@cindex opening object files
7172@include bfdsumm.texi
7173@end ifclear
7174
7175@node Reporting Bugs
7176@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7177@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7178@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7179
ff5dcc92 7180Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7181
7182Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7183it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7184to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7185work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7186@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7187
7188In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7189information that enables us to fix the bug.
7190
7191@menu
7192* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7193* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7194@end menu
7195
7196@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7197@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7198@cindex bug criteria
7199
7200If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7201
7202@itemize @bullet
7203@cindex fatal signal
7204@cindex linker crash
7205@cindex crash of linker
7206@item
7207If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7208@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7209
7210@cindex error on valid input
7211@item
ff5dcc92 7212If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7213
7214@cindex invalid input
7215@item
ff5dcc92 7216If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7217may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7218object files are correct.
7219
7220@item
7221If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7222improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7223@end itemize
7224
7225@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7226@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7227@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7228@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7229
7230A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7231products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7232recommend you contact that organization first.
7233
7234You can find contact information for many support companies and
7235individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7236distribution.
7237
ad22bfe8 7238@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7239Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7240@value{BUGURL}.
7241@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7242
7243The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7244@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7245fact or leave it out, state it!
7246
7247Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7248problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7249assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7250matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7251the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7252location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7253were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7254into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7255specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7256and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7257
7258Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7259the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7260on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7261
7262Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7263bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7264respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7265You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7266
7267To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7268
7269@itemize @bullet
7270@item
ff5dcc92 7271The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7272the @samp{--version} argument.
7273
7274Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7275the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7276
7277@item
ff5dcc92 7278Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7279patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7280
7281@item
7282The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7283version number.
7284
7285@item
ff5dcc92 7286What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7287``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7288
7289@item
7290The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7291observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7292list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7293sufficient.
7294
7295If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7296and then we might not encounter the bug.
7297
7298@item
7299A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7300bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7301provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7302bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7303state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7304requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7305we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7306attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7307
7308If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7309@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7310object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7311@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7312how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7313
7314@item
7315A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7316incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7317
ff5dcc92 7318Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7319will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7320not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7321a chance to make a mistake.
7322
7323Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7324say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7325copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7326C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7327and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7328fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7329you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7330any conclusion from our observations.
7331
7332@item
ff5dcc92 7333If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7334diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7335@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7336If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7337context, not by line number.
7338
7339The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7340sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7341@end itemize
7342
7343Here are some things that are not necessary:
7344
7345@itemize @bullet
7346@item
7347A description of the envelope of the bug.
7348
7349Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7350which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7351changes will not affect it.
7352
7353This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7354will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7355with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7356We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7357
7358Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7359of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7360output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7361less time, and so on.
7362
7363However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7364report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7365
7366@item
7367A patch for the bug.
7368
7369A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7370the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7371a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7372to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7373
ff5dcc92 7374Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7375construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7376through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7377able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7378fixed.
7379
7380And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7381patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7382help us to understand.
7383
7384@item
7385A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7386
7387Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7388things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7389@end itemize
7390
7391@node MRI
7392@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7393@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7394To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7395linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7396alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7397described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7398simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7399@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7400linker commands; these commands are described here.
7401
7402In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7403file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7404features to make use of them.
7405
7406You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7407@samp{-c} command-line option.
7408
7409Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7410command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7411blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7412MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7413issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7414
7415Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7416
7417You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7418lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7419The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7420
7421@table @code
7422@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7423@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7424@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7425Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7426the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7427@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7428your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7429script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7430commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7431input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7432@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7433
7434@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7435@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7436Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7437in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7438
7439@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7440
7441@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7442@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7443Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7444@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7445
7446@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7447@item BASE @var{expression}
7448Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7449absolute addresses) in the output file.
7450
7451@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7452@item CHIP @var{expression}
7453@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7454This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7455
7456@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7457@item END
7458This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7459
7460@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7461@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7462Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7463language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7464
7465@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7466@item
252b5132
RH
7467S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7468
7469@item
7470IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7471
7472@item
7473COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7474@samp{COFF}
7475@end enumerate
7476
7477@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7478@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7479Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7480@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7481
7482The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7483same line, with no change in its effect.
7484
7485@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7486@item LOAD @var{filename}
7487@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7488Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7489same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7490command line.
7491
7492@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7493@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7494@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7495MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7496option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7497
7498@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7499@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7500@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7501Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7502order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7503script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7504sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7505file, in the order specified.
7506
7507@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7508@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7509@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7510@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7511Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7512@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7513
7514@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7515@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7516@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7517@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7518You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7519specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7520If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7521@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7522@end table
7523
793c5807
NC
7524@node GNU Free Documentation License
7525@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7526@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7527
370b66a1
CD
7528@node LD Index
7529@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7530
7531@printindex cp
7532
7533@tex
7534% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7535% meantime:
7536\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7537\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7538\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7539\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7540\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7541\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7542\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7543\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7544\page\colophon
7545% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7546@end tex
7547
252b5132 7548@bye